JP2022028293A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest regarding a game machine capable of controlling a game state to a special state on the basis of the number of execution times of variable display.SOLUTION: First performance execution patterns ("patterns A-2, A-3") for executing a movable body performance before an execution period of an SP ready-to-win performance and during the execution period, and second performance execution patterns ("pattern A-1") for preventing execution of a movable body performance before an execution period of an SP ready-to-win performance and for executing it during the execution period of the SP ready-to-win performance are available. An execution ratio (for example, 90%) of the "pattern A-1" when a variable display result is losing in "a time-shortening state B" is higher than an execution ratio (for example, 10%) of the "pattern A-1" when a variable display result is losing in "a time-shortening state A", and is higher than an execution ratio (for example, 20%) of the "pattern A-1" when a variable display result is losing in "a probability variable state".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the probability of being controlled to a normal gaming state and determined to be a jackpot is set to about 1/300, and the special figure is executed. When the big hit does not occur even if the number of games reaches 1000 times, the gaming state is controlled to the ceiling probability change state, and the probability that the big hit is decided is increased to about 1/100. Further, it is disclosed that when a 1000-game jackpot does not occur in a normal gaming state, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the ceiling probability variation state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449

As with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of a gaming machine that can control the gaming state to a special state (time saving state) based on the number of executions of the variable display.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest in a gaming machine capable of controlling a gaming state to a special state based on the number of executions of variable display.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition.
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state.
A decidable means that can be determined to control to the advantageous state,
Movable movable body and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state is a first special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state controlled on condition that a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. And a third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the first effect that the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect and the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the specific effect. There are 2 production execution patterns,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect in the third special state. Higher than the rate at which the production execution pattern is executed,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 069SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D). Is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction number determination table for each transition opportunity. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining a state transition. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating play time (relief time reduction). Similarly, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the play time (relief time reduction). Similarly, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the play time (relief time reduction). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to battle rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to play time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding a pole / battle rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect concerning the variable display number display and the special number display. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the effect about the case where the relief time is shortened after clearing the RAM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the case where the relief time is shortened after clearing a RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect related to the case where the relief time reduction is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, and (B) is the time chart showing the modified example of the time reduction rush effect B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the case which the relief time is shortened by the variable display of 900 times after a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect operation example in the case where the reserved storage number is 0 when the relief time reduction is reached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect operation example in the case where the reserved storage number is 1 or more when the relief time shortening is reached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the customer waiting screen. It is a figure which shows the effect operation example about the transition to the customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG transformation example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect operation example concerning the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature part 069SG transformation example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game control timer interrupt processing as the characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing as a characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing as a characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the display process as the characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a figure which shows the characteristic part 069SG modification 3. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of various productions. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the countdown notice. Similarly, it is a figure which shows the production operation example of the countdown notice. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of a hold change notice. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of a symbol chance eye notice. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the effect display notice. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a reach advance notice execution decision table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing a button notice effect pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a character notice pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body motion pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body notice pattern determination table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining various operation examples for each gaming state. (A) is a timing chart showing a variable display mode of a symbol in a probabilistic state, a time-saving state A out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern, and (B) a time-saving state B out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern. This is an example of the production operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. This is an example of the production operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. This is an example of a production operation of a shortened non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. This is an example of the production operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of the non-reach deviation variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of the non-reach deviation variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing control operation examples in SP reach E, C, and D. It is a figure which compares super reach and non-reach off. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a rush introduction effect, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the time-saving rush effect A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing a probabilistic rushing effect, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the time-saving rushing effect B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 in feature part 069SG. It is a figure which shows a part of the variable display start setting process as the 2nd embodiment in a feature part 069SG. It is a figure which shows the variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the production operation of SP reach D. It is a figure for demonstrating the characteristic of each game state. In the feature unit 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal symbol, and (D) is the second start winning opening at the time of hitting the normal symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the opening time. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern according to the variable display result. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the probability change state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the probability change state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the winning probability to the starting winning opening and the winning interval. It is explanatory drawing of the period value α, β, γ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value α', β', γ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value δ, ε, ζ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value δ', ε', ζ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value η, θ, ι. It is explanatory drawing of the period value η', θ', ι'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value κ, λ, μ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value κ', λ', μ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value ν, ξ, π. It is explanatory drawing of the period value ν', ξ', π'. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting value for 10 hours of the pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design value of the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in a probable change state. It is explanatory drawing of the average fluctuation time when the variation of 2nd special figure is executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of the average fluctuation time when the variation display of 110 times of the 2nd special figure is executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have three reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have three reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have two reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state have two reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have one reserved storage number of the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have one reserved storage number of the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the reserved storage number of the second special figure is 0 in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is 0 in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature part 018SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the character type. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the character in the SP reach effects A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E. It is a figure which shows the output pattern of a sound effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. It is a tree diagram which shows the flow of SP reach effect A to E. It is a figure which shows the production operation example from the start of variable display of SP reach α, β, γ to the development into SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect A. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect B, C. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect D, E. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the effect of a hit / fail button effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the movable body effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the big hit notification of SP reach effect A to E. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the effect of the miss notification of SP reach effect A to E. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the ex post facto production A. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the ex post facto production B. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the ex post facto production B. (A) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table A, (B) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table B, and (C) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table C. It is a figure for demonstrating the data table for lighting a frame LED with a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. It is a figure for demonstrating the data table for lighting a frame LED with a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of Form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of out-of-order variation patterns (for example, two) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "out of time" is less than the number of possible variable display patterns (for example, time saving). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "state A" (for example, 3) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in "probability change state" (for example, 4).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "off", the variable display time of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" The average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and in the "probability state". A portion less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (for example, about 4.83 seconds), see FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the digestion rate of the variable display is higher than that of other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-1.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information in a plurality of columns (for example, decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C).
The starting order of the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the method and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed in
The time until the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column in which the variable display is started reaches the maximum speed is decorated in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the variable display to the advantageous state in the first special state. Decorative identification in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the identification information being the specific mode, and in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state. The start order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the information being the specific mode. It is common in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the state and the time-saving state A and the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B, but the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the highest. The time required to reach the speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 <ta1 to ta3), see FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state have the same variable display start order of the decoration identification information of each column, but the time until the maximum speed is reached is different. It is possible to give a different impression to each person and enhance their interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-1 or Form 1-2.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the method and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state. The stop order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from that when the non-specific display result is displayed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. If there is, the stop is displayed in the order of left → right → middle, and if it is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. See Fig. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display stop order of the decoration identification information in each column is different between the first special state and the second special state, so that a different impression can be given to each state and the interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-3.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the case and in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the advantageous state in the second special state. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed in
The time from when the decoration identification information of one of the plurality of columns is stopped and displayed until the next decoration identification information is stopped and displayed is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state. In the variable display, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode and the non-specific display result is displayed, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state. In the display, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without changing to the specific mode (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C is stopped. The order is the same for the case of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A and the case of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the time-saving state B. The time from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area of 1 to when the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. It may be different from the case of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the time from the stop display of one decoration identification information to the stop display of the next decoration identification information differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that each state has a different time. It can give a different impression and enhance the interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-4.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
Equipped with an output means that can output a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed.
Regarding the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1, the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the stop sound to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where the non-specific display result is displayed and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. It differs depending on whether the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is left, middle, or when it is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. The part where the right is stopped and displayed three times at different timings, and in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed once at the same timing. 11-51),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the stop of the decoration identification information by the stop sound, and the number of times the stop sound is output differs between the first special state and the second special state, which gives a different impression for each state. It can enhance the interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-5.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
Equipped with an output means that can output a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed.
Regarding the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1, the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the stop sound to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where the non-specific display result is displayed and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is the probabilistic state, the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state A, and the time saving state. It may be common to the case where the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is used in B),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the stop of the decoration identification information by the stop sound, and the development cost is reduced by making the number of times of the stop sound output common between the first special state and the second special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-6.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
When the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without being a specific mode when it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state, the decorative identification information is stopped. A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when displaying is provided.
When the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific operation display is executed, and when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific operation display is not executed (for example,). In the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B, the specific operation display (symbol stop) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is used. The part where the action) is not performed. See FIGS. 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to realize a smooth variable display by not executing the specific motion display in the second special state while enhancing the effect of the effect by the specific motion display in the first special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-7.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
When the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without being a specific mode when it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state, the decorative identification information is stopped. A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when displaying is provided.
The display mode of the specific operation display is common to the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example,). The specific motion display (symbol stop action) is common to the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A and the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the time saving state B. While enhancing the effect of the effect, the part that shares the mode of the specific operation display between the case of the probable change state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the mode of the specific operation display between the first special state and the second special state while enhancing the effect of the effect in the specific operation display.

The gaming machine of Form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-8.
It is possible to perform variable display in synchronization with the decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and predetermined identification information (for example, a small pattern) different from the decorative identification information.
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed until when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is a variable display of the decorative identification information when it is not determined by the determination means to control the predetermined identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the case of variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed without changing to the specific mode, the decorative identification information is obtained when it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state. The variable display mode of is shorter than the variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed without becoming a specific mode (for example, the period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the small symbol). , The case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is shorter than the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probable change state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)} Part. See Figures 11-51),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-9.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
The minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display, and 1 variable in the second special state. The minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the display until the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the next variable display is common (for example, 1 variable display in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A). The symbol confirmation period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the next variable display, and the decorative symbol with 1 variable display in the time saving state B. Is a part common to the symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from the stop display to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the next variable display. See FIGS. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control considering the drawing process until the decoration identification information is completely stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-10.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. In the case of variable display in which it is not determined to be performed, the variable display pattern determining means is common with the variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing"). An out-of-reach variation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (for example, "non-reach A") and an out-of-range variation pattern that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" and the "probability change state" (for example, "non-reach A"). ) And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of Form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of possible variable display patterns and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 is in the "time saving state B". The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns determinable in "time saving state A" (for example, 3), and the number of decidable deviation variation patterns is determinable in "probability change state". Less than the number of variation patterns (eg, 4),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "missing"). In the case of Less than the average time (for example, about 5.58 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "probability change state". FIG. -50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the digestion rate of the variable display is higher than that of other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state in the case of variable display that is not determined to be performed is common (for example,). The loss variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the loss variation display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP) that can be determined in at least one of the time reduction state A and the probabilistic state. Reach D) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1 or Form 2-2.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be performed is common (for example, the CPU 103 is in a time saving state). The loss variation pattern that can be determined in B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) and the loss variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) are common. Some parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-3.
The average period of the control period controlled by the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state is It is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic change state. It is preferable that the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than that in the third special state, so that the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-4.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the CPU 103 saves time). The number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the state B (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 3), and the number of deviation variation that can be determined in the time saving state A is smaller. The number of patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 4) that can be determined in the probabilistic state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased. You can enhance the fun of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of the form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1-1 to 1-11.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (for example, 2) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, 3).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "probability change state". Less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed and the state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-12.
The variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is a variable display part that executes the variable display of the identification information, and the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. Including the post-production part that informs the game value information that can be specified,
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the ex-post effect part in the first special state and the execution period of the ex-post effect part in the second special state are common (for example, the time saving state A and the variable display part of the probabilistic state). While the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time reduction state B, the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time reduction state A and the probable change state. ) And the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-61),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state and the second special state. ..

The gaming machine of Form 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-13.
It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner.
The variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is a variable display part that executes the variable display of the identification information, and the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. Including the post-production part that informs the game value information that can be specified,
A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the identification information to perform a specific operation when the identification information is stopped and displayed during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. Equipped with
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state). While the time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time saving state A and the probable change state. And the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-61.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the specific operation display in the variable display determined to be controlled in an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state. can.

The gaming machine of Form 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-14.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the first special state in common with the variable display pattern (for example, the variable display result is a "big hit"). In this case, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, "SP reach D") and the out-of-range fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, "SP reach D") are Common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of Form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-5.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 is "time saving state B". The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time saving state A" (for example, 2), and can be determined in "probability change state". Less than the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns (eg, 3),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "big hit". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” is the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time saving state A”. A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state". 50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed and the state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-6.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state is common (). For example, a jackpot variable display pattern (eg, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B and a jackpot variable display pattern (eg, probabilistic state) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, the probabilistic state). , SP reach D) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-7.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. At least a part of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state in the case of the variable display determined to be controlled is common (). For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, not via SP) are common. Some parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-8.
The average period of the control period controlled by the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state is It is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic change state. The part where the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than that in the third special state, so that the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 2-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-9.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the CPU 103 The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 2), and the number of jackpots that can be determined in the time-saving state A is small. The number of fluctuation patterns (for example, 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 3).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased. You can enhance the fun of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of Form 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-15.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a specific mode (for example, a reach mode). The first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the off-display result) and the variable decoration identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without changing the display mode to a specific mode.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" (for example, 97%) is when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A". It is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 (for example, 95%), and when the variable display result is "out of reach" in the "probability change state", the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103. Is higher than the determined rate (eg, 95%); see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-16.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
The period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information to the stop display in the second non-specific variable display pattern is the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the first non-specific variable display pattern. In the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, which is shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific aspect. A portion shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIGS. 11-62).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the variable display is completed in a shorter period than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-17.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from the start of variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined column among the plurality of columns to the stop display is the said in the first non-specific variable display pattern. It is shorter than the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column to the stop display (for example, in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is started. The period from to stop display (tb0 to tb1) is the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display (tb0) in the super reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. -A portion shorter than tb2). See Fig. 11-62),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column is completed in a short period of time, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-18.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (. For example, a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of Form 2-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 1-10.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a specific mode (for example, a reach mode). The first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the off-display result) and the variable decoration identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without changing the display mode to a specific mode.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined and the determination is made in the third special state. When the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the means, the rate is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, the variable display result in the "time saving state B"). The rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "off" (for example, 97%) is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state A". The "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "outlier" in the "probability change state" while being higher than the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined (for example, 95%). Higher than the percentage (eg, 95%), see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-11.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non that can be determined at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The specific variable display pattern is common (for example, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B, and can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (eg, non-reach) and common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-12.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. Is common (for example, a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. Non-reach) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of Form 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-19.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display of the decorative identification information is special after the variable display mode becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information are special without being a specific mode. It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "not via SP", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, the reach mode in the time saving state B). The rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is determined (for example, 90%) is the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A. Is higher than the rate at which "" is determined (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the probable change state is determined (for example, 5%). (See Figures 11-69),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. In the above, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-20.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
A first specific operation display in which the decoration identification information is specifically operated when the variable display mode is a specific mode, and a second specific operation display in which the decoration identification information is specifically operated when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed (for example,). It is equipped with a display means that can execute the symbol stop action display).
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are executed by the display means, but in the second specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display is performed by the display means. The second specific operation display is executed without executing the operation display (for example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach E via reach, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display are executed, but the reach is executed. In the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through, the part where the reach specific operation display is not executed and the jackpot specific operation display is executed. See FIGS. 11-55).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the first specific operation display, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-21.
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (for example,). A non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B, and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. Is a common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of Form 2-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-13.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and the control can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information of) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state. Includes a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) that is controlled when
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display of the decorative identification information is special after the variable display mode becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information are special without being a specific mode. It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via A", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined and the determination is made in the third special state. When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, "SP reach D" which does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B. The rate at which the "big hit variation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is determined (for example, 90%) is the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A is determined ( For example, a portion higher than 5%) and higher than the rate (for example, 5%) in which the “SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern” that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probabilistic state (see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. In the above, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-14.
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state, and the second specific variable that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The display pattern is common (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP), and a non-decidable pattern in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, the part that is common with SP non-via),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-15.
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. Is common (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and a non-reach loss variation pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, SP). (Non-via) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of Form 1-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-22.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and an effect execution means.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The variable display pattern determining means may control the holding storage to the advantageous state by the determining means without storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means in the first special state and the second special state. In the case of variable display that is not determined, it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the second reserved storage means can store the reserved storage.
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and the predetermined variable display in the second special state. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, the suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state A". When the variable display is executed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state", "movable body notice", "character notice", etc. in the variable display. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B", the "movable body notice" or "movable body notice" is executed in the variable display. A part that does not perform suggestive effects such as "character notice". See Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestion effect is used. It is possible to provide a suitable second special condition because it is not unnecessarily agitated.

The gaming machine of Form 1-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-23.
In the second special state, when the variable display is such that the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state, the effect executing means does not execute the suggestion effect, and the determination means controls the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means (for example, in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" or the "character notice" is executed in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern. If it is a big hit fluctuation pattern, "movable body notice" or "character notice" may be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-24.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern for displaying the display result of the variable display after the variable display mode of the decorative identification information becomes a specific mode.
The suggestion effect includes a fanning effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode is a specific mode (for example, the suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display mode is controlled to the jackpot gaming state has the variable display mode as the reach mode. "Reach notice" or "button notice" may be included as a fanning effect to incite whether or not (whether or not reach is established).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-25.
The effect executing means includes a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including (for example, a first suggestion effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) based on a variable display result) and a case where the first suggestion effect is executed. The second suggestion effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), which is highly controlled by the jackpot game state, and the part where multiple types of suggestion effects including can be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of Form 2-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-16.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice" or a "character notice") that can execute an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
In the variable display pattern determining means, the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and the determination means has the advantage. When the variable display is not determined to be controlled by the state, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period capable of storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means is determined. It is possible and
The effect executing means is variable when the variable display is executed by the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed by the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state. The suggestion effect can be executed in the display, and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state, the suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, "time saving state A"). When the variable display is executed with the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0, and when the variable display is executed with the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state", the variable display is displayed. When it is executed, the suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the reserved storage number is 0 in the "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in, the part in which the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is not executed in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestion effect is used. It is possible to provide a suitable second special condition because it is not unnecessarily fanned.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of Form 1-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-26.
The identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). A game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of identification information as hold storage (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information about a game (for example, an effect control command), and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means (for example). , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the look-ahead notice effect)
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The effect executing means selects one pre-reading notice effect pattern from a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice"). Decidable,
The number of pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determination means can be determined in the first special state. The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns. The variable display result is out of order in the "probability change state" as well as less than the number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 3) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of look-ahead notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, a part less than 4),
The rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed in the case of the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state is the advantageous state in the first special state. It is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" (for example). , 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice (for example, 30%) when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state A", and when the variable display result is out of place in the "probability change state". The portion lower than the execution rate (for example, 40%) of the look-ahead notice in (see FIG. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and the pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-27.
As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the second special state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern and the first look-ahead notice effect pattern are executed. There is also a second look-ahead notice effect pattern, which has a high rate of being controlled in the advantageous state.
The rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the time saving state A and the time saving state). As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice" The "blue" pattern) and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye", in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "notice" and "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is , A portion lower than the rate at which the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely to be unnecessarily fanned by the first look-ahead notice effect, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-28.
As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the second special state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern and the first look-ahead notice effect pattern are executed. There is also a second look-ahead notice effect pattern, which has a high rate of being controlled in the advantageous state.
The rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the time saving state A and the time saving state). As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice" The "blue" pattern) and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye", in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "notice" and "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is , A portion higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the second look-ahead notice effect is likely to be executed in the second special state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-29.
The look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means in the second special state are common (for example, the time saving state A). The look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the probable change state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, "design chance eye notice"). part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of Form 2-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 1-17.
The identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). A game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of identification information as hold storage (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information about a game (for example, an effect control command), and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means (for example). , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the look-ahead notice effect)
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means selects one pre-reading notice effect pattern from a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice"). Decidable,
The number of pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determination means can be determined in the first special state. It is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns and less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, for effect control when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B"). The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the CPU 120 is the number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 3) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state A". The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, less than 4) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state").
The rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed in the case of the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state is the advantageous state in the first special state. It is a variable display that is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled, and is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the third special state. In some cases, the rate of execution of the look-ahead notice is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed (for example, the rate of execution of the look-ahead notice (for example, 0%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is "time saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of order (for example, 30%), and the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of place in the "probability change state" (for example, 40%). ) Lower than. See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and the pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-18.
The look-ahead notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in the second special state, and the look-ahead notice effect in which the effect execution means can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The pattern is common (for example, the look-ahead notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B, and the look-ahead in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. The notice effect pattern is common (for example, "design chance eye notice").
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-19.
The look-ahead notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in the second special state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state are Common (for example, the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability change state are common. There is (for example, "design chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-20.
The number of the look-ahead notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the second special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the first special state. The number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in one special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the third special state (for example, "time saving"). The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in "state B" is produced when the variable display result is out of order in "time saving state A". The number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state" while being smaller than the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the control CPU 120 (for example, 3). (For example, less than 4),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable look-ahead notice effect patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable look-ahead notice effect patterns is increased. By doing so, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of Form 1-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-30.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation, and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, "time saving state B". The execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in "" (for example, 10% for a big hit and 5% for a missed state) is the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, a big hit). A portion lower than 80% (80%, 20% off) and lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% on the jackpot and 30% on the off). 50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is urged to move in one variable display in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less, so a suitable second special condition can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-32 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-31.
In the second special state, when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio at which the operation promotion effect is executed by the effect execution means is the advantage by the determination means. When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the state, the ratio is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion effect is executed by the effect executing means (for example, in the time saving state B, the effect control is performed when the variable display result is a big hit. The rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 for effect (for example, 10%) is higher than the rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control (for example, 5%) when the variable display result is out of alignment. High part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the fact that the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-33 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-32.
As the operation promotion effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means, the first operation promotion effect pattern and the second operation promotion in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first operation promotion effect pattern is executed. There is a production pattern,
The rate at which the second operation promotion effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second operation promotion effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the effect of "button notice". As a pattern, there are a "blow" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the "blow" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed (for example, 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or probability variation (for example, 40%), but the time saving state The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in B may be higher than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variation state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state, the second operation promotion effect pattern is often obtained, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-34 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-33.
The period in which the operation promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the "button" is used. The period during which the "notice" is executed and the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the "reach notice" is executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the operation promotion effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-34.
The effect executing means can execute the operation promotion preparation effect before executing the operation promotion effect.
The period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has ". Before executing the "button notice", an operation promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, an effect or effect display in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in is displayed before the operation valid period starts is displayed. The period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state B are common when the effect is enabled. It is preferable to do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the operation promotion preparation effect between the first special state and the second special state, the development cost can be reduced and the operation promotion effect is executed. It can be suitably notified.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of Form 2-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-21.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation, and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state, and in the third special state. The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for a big hit and 5% for a miss)). , It is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" (for example, 80% for the big hit and 20% for the miss), and the button notice per 1 variable display in the "probability change state". The portion lower than the execution rate (for example, 80% for big hits and 30% for misses), see Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is urged to move in one variable display in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less, so a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of Form 1-36 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-35.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "hit / fail button effect") capable of executing an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation and a specific effect that notifies that the player is controlled to the advantageous state. And the part where "movable body production" can be executed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As an effect execution pattern of the operation promotion effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect execution means in the variable display of 1, a first effect execution pattern (for example, "for example," Patterns A-2, A-3 ") and a second effect execution pattern (for example," pattern A-1 ") that executes the specific effect without executing the operation promotion effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. It is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control (for example, in the time saving state B, the "movable body" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern. The ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" (for example, 90%) is to execute the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A. It is higher than the rate of executing "immediate hit effect" (for example, 0%), and "movable body effect" is executed without executing "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probable change state. A portion higher than the rate at which "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect" is executed (for example, 0%), see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it was decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to prompt the player to move when notified.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of Form 2-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-22.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect including an operation promotion effect for encouraging a player's operation and a specific effect for notifying that the player is controlled to an advantageous state is "button notice" and ". The part where the "hit / fail button effect" can be executed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As an effect execution pattern of the operation promotion effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect execution means in the variable display of 1, a first effect execution pattern (for example, "for example," Patterns A-2, A-3 ") and a second effect execution pattern (for example," pattern A-1 ") that executes the specific effect without executing the operation promotion effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect in the third special state. Execution of "immediate hit effect" that executes "movable body effect" without executing "win / fail button effect" in SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, which is higher than the rate at which the effect execution pattern is executed. The ratio (for example, 90%) is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A, and also A portion higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state, see FIGS. 11-69.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it was decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to prompt the player to move when notified.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of Form 1-37 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-36.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation, and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As the types of the motion promotion effect that can be executed by the effect execution means, a first motion promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display of a "blow" operation) that urges the player to perform one operation and a predetermined operation period for the player are performed. There is a second movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display of "continuous hit" or "long press" operation) that encourages movement.
The effect executing means can execute both the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect in the first special state, and can execute the first operation promotion effect in the second special state. On the other hand, the second operation promotion effect is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has neither a "blow pattern" nor a "continuous hit pattern" or a "long press pattern" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A". Execution can be determined, and in "time saving state B", the "blow pattern" can be determined, but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. See Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, annoying operation such as operation over a predetermined operation period is taken into consideration that a period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less likely to be prompted to the player, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of Form 2-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-23.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") capable of executing an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation, and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As the types of the motion promotion effect that can be executed by the effect execution means, a first motion promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display of a "blow" operation) that urges the player to perform one motion and a predetermined motion period for the player are performed. There is a second movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display of "continuous hit" or "long press" operation) that encourages movement.
The effect executing means can execute both the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect in the first special state and the third special state, and the first operation in the second special state. While the promotion effect can be executed, the second operation promotion effect is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a "blow pattern" and a "continuous hit pattern, long press" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A". Execution can be determined for any of the "patterns", and in the "time saving state B", the "blow pattern" can be determined, but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. FIG. 11-50. reference),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, annoying operation such as operation over a predetermined operation period is taken into consideration that a period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less likely to be prompted to the player, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of Form 1-38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-37.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The effect executing means is controlled to the first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") and the advantageous state as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high proportion.
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The execution rate of "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 (for example, big hit 0%, loss 0%) is the execution rate of "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state A" (for example,). A portion lower than the jackpot 90%, missed 30%) and lower than the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, jackpot 90%, missed 40%). FIG. -50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is suggested that the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-38.
In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, it is determined that the ratio at which the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. In the case of the variable display, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the first special state is higher (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B. The ratio (for example, 0%) is lower than the ratio (for example, 90%) in which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit, but the variable display result is The rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B in the case of a big hit is higher than the rate in which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probable change state when the variable display result is a big hit. May be),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the suggestion effect different between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-39.
In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the ratio at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. Is higher than the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined (for example, "vibration (small)" in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit. The rate at which the pattern is executed (for example, 0%) is greater than the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 30%). Although it is also low, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is "vibration (small)" in the time saving state A or the probable change state when the variable display result is a big hit. Small) ”pattern may be higher than the percentage executed (eg, 30%)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the suggestion effect different between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of Form 2-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-24.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means is controlled to the first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") and the advantageous state as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high proportion.
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the 2nd special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the 1st special state, and 1 in the 3rd special state. The execution rate of the "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 in the "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for the jackpot and 0% for the loss) is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per variable display. It is lower than the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 30%), and "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". Is lower than the execution rate (for example, 90% for big hits and 40% for misses). See Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is suggested that the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of Form 1-41 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-40.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and the control can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "character notice" or a "reach notice") that can execute an effect including a fanning effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set as a specific mode. Part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The execution rate of "character notice" per variable display of 1 (for example, big hit 10%, missed 5%) is the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state A" (for example, big hit 80). %, Out of 20%) and lower than the execution rate of "Character notice" per 1 variable display in "Probability change state" (for example, big hit 80%, out of 30%), and "time saving state B". The execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "" (for example, 20%) is higher than the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 40%). A portion that is low and lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the specific display is displayed or not is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of Form 2-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-25.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and the control can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "character notice" or a "reach notice") that can execute an effect including a fanning effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set as a specific mode. Part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the first special state, and 1 in the third special state. The execution rate of the "character notice" per variable display of 1 in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit and 5% for the loss) is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per variable display (for example, the time saving state B). It is lower than the execution rate of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "state A" (for example, big hit 80%, missed 20%), and execution of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". It is lower than the ratio (for example, big hit 80%, missed 30%). Further, the execution ratio (for example, 20%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "time reduction state B" is "time reduction state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 40%), and also from the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 50%). Low part. See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the specific display is displayed or not is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of Form 1-42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-41.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Movable movable body (for example, movable body 32) and
An effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state. The part where "movable body production" can be performed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern (for example, "Patterns A-2, A-3") that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the movable body effect that is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, are described above. There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in "Time saving state B" is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control. (For example, 90%) is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in "Time saving state A", and is variable display in "Probability change state". A portion higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of "Pattern A-1" when the result is out of order. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-42.
The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determination means in the second special state. The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is common (for example, in the case of a time saving state A or a big hit in a probable change state, "movable". Control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in "body effect" (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), and "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. The control data used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) are common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the movable body between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-43.
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light
With the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the first special state. Control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the movable body LED 208 slightly frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect". (For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) and a movable body that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. A part that is common to the control data used for controlling the LED 208 (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended command such as B000),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state. ..

The gaming machine of Form 1-45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-44.
A display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body is provided.
An effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image. It is common with the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" (movable body effect image of FIGS. 11-59 (D1)). (Refer to 069SG456) and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-45.
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
The vibration mode executed by the vibrating means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the above-mentioned. In the second special state, when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect is common. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect", and the case of the big hit in the time saving state B. In the "movable body effect", the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-47 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-46.
The rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the first special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state. When it is decided to control, the ratio is higher than the rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, "Patterns A-2, A-". The rate at which "3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed (for example, 80 to 90%) is "Pattern A-2, A-3 (first effect)" when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. Execution pattern) ”is executed (for example, higher than 10%)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first special state, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the movable body operates.

The gaming machine of Form 1-48 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-47.
The execution frequency of the movable body effect in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body effect in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about). 10%) is the part that is lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state A or the probable change state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily in the second special state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of Form 2-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-15.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A movable body that can move (for example, a movable body 32) and
An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state. The part where "movable body production" can be performed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern (for example, "Patterns A-2, A-3") that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the movable body effect that is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, are described above. There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect in the third special state. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 90%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is higher than the rate at which the effect execution pattern is executed (for example, the time saving state A). Is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of order in "Probability change state", and "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of place in "Probability change state". Higher than the execution rate (eg, 20%). See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of Form 1-49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-48.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
A specific effect for notifying that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and a specific effect executed after the specific effect and given in the advantageous state. An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "movable body effect") that can execute an effect including a post-effect that notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls) that can specify the magnitude of the game value. And the part where "post-production" can be performed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (for example, 2) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, 3).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "probability change state". Less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See FIG. 11-50).
The effect mode of the ex-post effect is common to the case where the ex-post effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the ex-post effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP). As shown in FIG. 11-60, the production mode of the "post-production" that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot gaming state that notifies that the reach production is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is described in the "time saving state". The part common to "B", "probability change state", and "time saving state A". See Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is the same as the first special state after being informed that the digestion speed of the variable display is increased by reducing the types of variable display patterns and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, and that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it can be excited by the production of.

The gaming machine of Form 1-50 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-49.
It is determined that the specific effect executed when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the first special state and the determination means controls the advantageous state in the second special state. The specific effect executed when it is performed is common (for example, the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variation state, and the variable in the time saving state B. The part that is common to the "movable body effect" that is executed when the display result is a big hit. See Fig. 11-59 (D1)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the specific effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-51 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-50.
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light
Used for controlling the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the ex-post effect in the first special state and for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the ex-post effect in the second special state. The control data is common (for example, the control data used for controlling the movable LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probabilistic state, and the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B are linked. Is common to the control data used to control the movable LED 208 to emit light (for example, the light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-52 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-51.
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
A vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state, and a vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. Is common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probabilistic state, and executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. Is in common with the vibration mode to be performed (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the post-production in the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of Form 2-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-27.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
A specific effect for notifying that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and a specific effect executed after the specific effect and given in the advantageous state. An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "movable body effect") that can execute an effect including a post-effect that notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls) that can specify the magnitude of the game value. And the part where "post-production" can be performed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 is "time saving state B". The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time saving state A" (for example, 2), and can be determined in "probability change state". The number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns (for example, less than 3),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "big hit". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” is the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time saving state A”. A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state". 50),
The effect mode of the post-effect is the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-effect is executed in the third special state. This is common to the case where the post-article production is executed (for example, the "post-production" that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state that notifies that the SP reach production is controlled to the big hit game state. As shown in FIG. 11-60, the production mode of the above is common to the “time saving state B”, the “probability changing state”, and the “time saving state A”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. After being informed that the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the digestion rate of the variable display is increased and the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, the first special state and the first state Since it is possible to excite with the same effect as the 3 special states, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of Form 1-53 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-52.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The variable display pattern determining means is
The second reserved storage is a variable display in which the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state and the control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means. It is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (eg, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the means can store the hold storage.
The predetermined variable display period when the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than that (for example, the CPU 103 is a time for storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage when the reserved storage number is 0 in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. While it is possible to determine an out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds), the time saving state B When the number of reserved storages is 0, the variable display time is longer than the variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). A portion in which a short shortened non-reach variation pattern (eg, ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds) can be determined; see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is made even when the hold storage is not stored, considering that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digestion rate of the variable display does not decrease, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of Form 2-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-28.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means is
When the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state or the third special state, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. , A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period capable of storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means can be determined.
The predetermined variable display period when the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than that (for example, the CPU 103 is a time for storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage when the reserved storage number is 0 in the probability change state or the time saving state A. While it is possible to determine an out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds), the time saving state B When the number of reserved storages is 0, the variable display time is longer than the variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). Can determine short shortened non-reach variation patterns (eg, ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds; see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is made even when the hold storage is not stored, considering that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digestion rate of the variable display does not decrease, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of Form 1-54 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-53.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
When the control of the special state is started, the effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the effect including the special state start effect of notifying the start of the control of the special state by displaying the special state start display. The part where the CPU 120 can execute the "rush effect") and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The effect executing means is
When the control of the first special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect.
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image are displayed in the probability change rush effect. While displaying the inrush image 069SG472 composed of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is common with the inrushing image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B. A portion that displays the inrush image 069SG470 and displays the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. FIGS. 11-50, 11-63, (See Figures 11-64),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the first special state is set in the special state start effect in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since not only the special state start display common to the time when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed, the start of the second special state can be excited.

The gaming machine of Form 1-55 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-54.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means. In the processing, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means can determine a special variable display pattern for a variable display period in which the special state start effect can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state is started (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time capable of executing the "rush effect" in the relief time reduction arrival variation).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special state start effect can be suitably executed.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of Form 2-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-29.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko game machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
When the control of the special state is started, the effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the effect including the special state start effect of notifying the start of the control of the special state by displaying the special state start display. The part where the CPU 120 can execute the "rush effect") and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means is
When the control of the third special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect.
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and the special display that is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image are displayed in the probability change rush effect. While displaying the inrush image 069SG472 composed of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is common with the inrushing image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B. A portion that displays the inrush image 069SG470 and displays the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. FIGS. 11-50, 11-63, (See Figures 11-64),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time, in the special state start effect, the third special state is used. Not only the special state start display common to when the control is started, but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed, so that the start of the second special state can be excited.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of Form 1-56 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-55.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)), including
When the determination means determines that the decorative variable display means is controlled to the advantageous state, the decorative variable display means is displayed as a variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. It is possible to execute a special decorative variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result to be displayed is variablely displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determination means determines to control the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determination means in the first special state. It is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is decided to control to an advantageous state (for example, when "big hit C (10R)" is decided as a big hit type in the time saving state B, it is produced. The rate at which the control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" (for example, 100%) is such that when the "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 "SP reach". The effect control CPU 120 is higher than the rate of executing "D (full rotation)" (for example, 0% (non-execution)) and when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the probabilistic state. A portion higher than the rate at which "SP reach D (full rotation)" is executed (eg, 0% (non-execution)), see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is controlled to the second advantageous state having a high advantage in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. When is determined, a special variable display is likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of Form 2-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-30.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and the control can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decorative identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information of) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state. Includes a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) that is controlled when
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)), including
When the determination means determines that the decorative variable display means is controlled to the advantageous state, the decorative variable display means is displayed as a variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. It is possible to execute a special decorative variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result to be displayed is variablely displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determination means determines to control the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determination means in the first special state. When it is determined that the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, and it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state by the determining means in the third special state. (For example, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 executes "full rotation effect". The rate (for example, 100%) is the rate at which the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A (for example, 100%). For example, when it is higher than 0% (non-execution) and "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the probability change state, the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)". Higher than the percentage (eg, 0% (non-execution)); see Figures 11-69),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is controlled to the second advantageous state having a high advantage in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. When is determined, a special variable display is likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(Characteristic part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of Form 1 of the feature unit 099SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the first number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled to the advantageous state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B). The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of Small part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-100) The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 uncontrolled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value executed in the first special state. One variable that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state by the first number of times and that is executed in the third special state and is not controlled by the advantageous state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for display by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, which is the average fluctuation time of one variation in the time saving state B). The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is. A portion smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state, by 110),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-101) The gaming machine of Form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled to the advantageous state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B). The period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of, by 1100, is the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time saving state A, by 1100. 'Small part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-102) The gaming machine of Form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 uncontrolled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is the period value executed in the first special state. One variable that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times and that is executed in the third special state and is not controlled by the advantageous state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for display by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, which is the average fluctuation time of one variation in the time saving state B). The period value ψ'obtained by multiplying β by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ'obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100, and is a period value. ψ'is a part smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the probabilistic state, by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-103) The gaming machine of Form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-104) The gaming machine of Form 6 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 0, by 110 is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value ξ is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is 0 by 110, and the period value ξ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 0, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-105) The gaming machine of Form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, it starts when the number of reserved second special figures is 0 in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-106) The gaming machine of Form 8 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved storages is 0 is 1100 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value ξ'is smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of stored items is 0 is 1100, and the period value ξ'is. The part smaller than the period value π'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 0 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-107) The gaming machine of Form 9 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B. The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of the form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. The second special figure in the time saving state B is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19). The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order, which is started when the number of reserved storages is one, by 110 is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value λ is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is 1, is 110, and the period value λ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 1, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-109) The gaming machine of Form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B. The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-110) The gaming machine of the form 12 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is 1. The second special figure in the time saving state B is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20). The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of reserved storages is one is 1100 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value λ is smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of stored items is one is 1100, and the period value λ is probable. The part smaller than the period value μ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the state, and the variable display result is out of order, by 1100) ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-111) The gaming machine of the form 13 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of the form 14 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 2, and the variable display result is out of order by 110, is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value θ is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is 2, is 110, and the period value θ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 2, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-113) The gaming machine of the form 15 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of the form 16 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved storages is 2 is 1100 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value θ'is smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of storages is 2, is 1100, and the period value θ'is. The part smaller than the period value ι'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 2 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 110. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-115) The gaming machine of Form 17 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-116) The gaming machine of the form 18 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 110, is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value ε is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is three is out of order by 110, and the period value ε is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-117) The gaming machine of Form 19 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
It is possible to control a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently than the non-special state. A state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) is provided.
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of the form 20 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100, is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value ε'is smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of storages is 3 is 1100, and the period value ε'is. The part smaller than the period value ζ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 3 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, a right gaming area and a left gaming area) where the gaming medium can flow down.
As the variable display, the variable display of the special identification information and the variable display of the normal identification information can be executed (for example, the part where the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed).
Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information, the game medium is in the first state (for example, the open state) in which the game medium can enter and the game medium is more than the first state. A variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning opening) that is changed to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to enter, and
A hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display of the special identification information as hold storage.
Equipped with
The game area has a special path provided with the variable means (for example, a left game area) and a non-special path different from the special path (for example, a right game area).
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding). The number of reserved storages that can be stored with the storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, FIG. 12-2 (for example, FIG. 12-2). As shown in B), the part where the probability of hitting a normal figure is the same regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability variation state),.
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, in FIG. 12-2 (D)). As shown, the part where the opening time of the second starting winning opening is 3 seconds regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability change state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, in both the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a game in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area. The part that is in the state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the part where the playability is common between the first special state and the second special state, and the playability is improved between the first special state and the second special state which are the same special states. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the large difference.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the variable display not controlled by the advantageous state of the first number of times or the second number of times is executed in each special state, the start time point of the measurement is , The timing when the game ball is launched, or the timing when the launched game ball wins the start winning opening, including the time when the launch of the game medium is started (for example, the variable display period in which the variable display result is off) The part that calculates the average variable display period as the period from to the end timing of the variable display based on the start prize),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the period value measured can be appropriately obtained.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2, Form 6, Form 10, Form 14, and Form 18.
Equipped with a hold storage means that can store multiple information related to variable display as hold storage.
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first regardless of the gaming state). The number of reserved storages that can be stored in the special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),.
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled by the advantageous state varies depending on the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means (for example, FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, 12-). As shown in 10, since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is out of alignment differs depending on the number of reserved storages, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment is stored. (Different part depending on the number of reserved memories),
The period value is a total value obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed for each reserved storage number to the first number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved storage number (for example, FIG. 12-13). As shown in, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed in each hold storage number to the 110 variable displays by the average variable display period of each hold storage number. The part that is),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the first special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period A, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio a (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is out of order. The average variable display period, a is a portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period B and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio b (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of order). The average variable display period, b is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period C and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio c (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 is out of order). The average variable display period, c is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period D and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is out of order). The average variable display period, d is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times of the time saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, and the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value α is a part calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to the 23rd or 24th form.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the second special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period E, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, in E, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, e is the portion where the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period F and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio f (for example, in F, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, f is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period G and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio g (for example, in G, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 2 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, g is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period H and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio h (for example, in H, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 3 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, h is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value β is a part calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 23rd to 25th forms.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the third special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period I, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of reserved second special figures is 0 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, i is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period J and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio j (for example, J is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, j is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period K and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio k (for example, K is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 2 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, k is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period L and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio l (for example, L is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, l is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The period value of the third special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, and the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, the first number of times, the ratio l, and the average variable display period L. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value γ is a part calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 27th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 4th, 8th, 12th, 16th, and 20th forms.
A holding storage means (for example, the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as the holding storage is provided.
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first regardless of the gaming state). The number of reserved storages that can be stored in the special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10). Since the selection rate of the variable display variation pattern that causes the display result to be off differs depending on the number of reserved storages, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to be off depends on the number of reserved storages. part),
The period value is a total value obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed for each reserved storage number to the second number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved storage number (for example, FIG. 12-14). As shown in, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed in each reserved storage number to the 1100 variable display times by the average variable display period of each reserved storage number. The part that is),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 28th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 27th embodiment.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the first special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period A, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio a'(for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is out of order). The average variable display period, a'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period B and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio b'(for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of order). The average variable display period, b'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period C and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio c'(for example, C is a time saving state A and the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is two is out of order. The average variable display period, c'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period D and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio d'(for example, in D, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 3 in the time saving state A is out of order. The average variable display period, d'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable display of the time saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, and the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period B, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c'and the average variable display period C, the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period D (for example, the period value α'is calculated by the value of A × a'+ B × b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the means 29 is the gaming machine according to the 27th or 28th form.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the second special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period E, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e'(for example, in the time saving state B, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is out of order). The average variable display period, e'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period F and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio f'(for example, F is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is one is out of order. The average variable display period, f'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period G and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio g'(for example, G is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is two is out of order. The average variable display period, g'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable display of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period H and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio h'(for example, H is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 is out of order. The average variable display period, h'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period F, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period H (for example, the period value β'is calculated by the value of E × e'+ F × f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of the 27th to 29th forms.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the third special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period I, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number is the ratio i'(for example, I is out of the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state. In the average variable display period, i'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period J and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio j'(for example, J is the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probabilistic state). Average variable display period, j'is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure hold memory in the probabilistic state to 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period K and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio k'(for example, K is a variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 2 in the probabilistic state). In the average variable display period, k'is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period L and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio l'(for example, L is a variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state). In the average variable display period, l'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The period value of the third special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, and the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period J, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period L (for example, the period value γ'is calculated by the value of I × i'+ J × j'+ K × k'+ L × l'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

(Characteristic part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) The gaming machine of the form 3-1 of the feature unit 018 SG form is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
With a light emitting body (for example, a movable body LED 208, a frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) and
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the specific effect of notifying whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state and the special effect of operating the movable body and causing the light emitting body to emit light, may be used. SP reach production A to E and the part where movable body production can be performed) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect B) that displays a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state. ) And the second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) that notifies whether or not the specific character is controlled to the advantageous state without displaying the specific character.
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the execution period of the specific effect (for example, among the execution periods of the SP reach effect (ta2 to ta5). The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the first specific effect, the specific character (for example, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with the effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (FIG. 13-14). (D2) (see D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the operation of the movable body in the same mode as the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is displayed. Is not displayed (see Fig. 13-14 (D1)),
The light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect (for example, the light emitting pattern LP3-2) is a case where the special effect is executed in the first specific effect and a case where the special effect is executed in the second specific effect. (See Fig. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first specific effect in which the specific character is displayed and the second specific effect in which the specific character is not displayed, the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitting body in the special effect are standardized and the manufacturing cost is reduced. It is possible to enhance the relationship between the specific effect and the special effect depending on whether or not the specific character is displayed during the execution period of the special effect, and to improve the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of Form 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-1.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific effect is executed than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, the super reach β is higher than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α). Since the fluctuation pattern of is higher than the SP reach production A, the SP reach production B and the SP reach production C have a higher jackpot expectation (big hit expectation: SP reach production A <SP reach production B). <SP reach production C) part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-1 or Form 3-2.
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is the SP reach. Common to the productions A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach production A = SP reach production B = SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effect common, the control data of the movable body and the light emitting body in the special effect can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-3.
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period after the first period.
While the effect mode in the first period is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the effect mode in the second period differs between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (the first specific effect and the second specific effect). For example, the execution period of the movable body effect includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the effect mode in the first period is common to the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the effect mode in the second period is different between the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. FIG. 13-14 (D1). The image shown is different from the image shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is either the first specific effect or the second specific effect until the first period, while further reducing the manufacturing cost by sharing the effect mode until the first period. Since it is unclear whether or not, it is possible to improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of Form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-4.
As the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) that displays a special character (for example, enemy character X-2) different from the specific character.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the third specific effect is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state). The determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect E when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. Is 800/997),
In the third specific effect, an effect image common to the first specific effect according to the movement of the movable body during the execution period of the special effect executed when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the effect image 018SG250B) is displayed and the special character (for example, the character image 018SGX2) is displayed.
The light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect executed in the third specific effect (for example, the light emitting pattern LP3-2) is the light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect executed in the first specific effect. Common (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by standardizing the operation mode of the movable body and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body in each special effect, and to increase the specific effect in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different. It can be done, and it is possible to pay attention to which specific effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-5.
A motion detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
Light emission of the light emitting body in the special effect regardless of the detection timing in which the motion of the player is detected by the motion detection means in the motion valid period before the notification that the control to the advantageous state is controlled in the specific effect. The end mode is common (for example, an arbitrary timing in which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when is finished, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the light emitting end mode of the light emitting body can be changed by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-6.
The effect executing means can execute a post-period effect (big hit notification) in a post-period after the special effect during the specific effect.
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific effect in which the post-period effect is executed (for example, the jackpot is confirmed as the post-period effect in the post-period after the movable body effect during the execution of the SP reach effects A to E). Notification can be executed, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 are common regardless of the types of SP reach effects A to E (for example, light emission pattern LP3). -2) Part. See Fig. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the post-period effect is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of the specific effect, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-7.
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The effect executing means can output a special effect sound from the sound output means in the special effect.
The output pattern of the special effect sound is common to all types of the specific effect (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to all types of SP reach effects A to E (sound). Pattern BP0-1 to 3) part. See FIG. 13-6 (C)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the output pattern of the special production sound, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of Form 3-9 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-8.
A motion detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
Regardless of the detection timing in which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means in the operation valid period before the notification that the control to the advantageous state is controlled in the specific effect, the special effect sound in the special effect The output end mode is common (for example, at any time when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation is valid without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the end of the period, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1-4).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the output end mode of the special production sound can be changed by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-9.
The specific character displayed in the special effect executed in the first specific effect is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the movable body 32 is displayed. The effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to vibration has a display color common to or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a portion displayed in a similar color).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the relationship between the specific character and the effect image can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of Form 3-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-10.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) and
An effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a specific effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, a special effect for operating the movable body, and a post-effect executed after the special effect. CPU 120 can execute SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B)
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, an effect of displaying a specific character (for example, an enemy character) and notifying whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state is referred to as a first aspect (for example, SP reach effect B). It can be executed in the second aspect (for example, SP reach effect D).
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the execution period of the specific effect (for example, among the execution periods of the SP reach effect (ta2 to ta5). The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first aspect and the second aspect, the specific character (for example, the character image) together with the common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body. 018SGX1) is displayed,
When the specific effect is executed in the first aspect, the post-effect using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the first aspect is not executed, and the specific effect is the second aspect. When executed in the embodiment, the post-effect using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the second aspect is executed (for example, in the case of the SP reach effect B, in the SP reach effect). Instead of the post-effect B using the displayed enemy character X-1, the post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIGS. 13-17), while the SP reach effect D is the SP reach effect. Post-production B (part where the post-effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the above is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first aspect and the second aspect, the common specific character is displayed in a different effect while reducing the manufacturing cost by standardizing the operation mode of the specific character and the movable body in the special effect. As a result, the relationship between the specific effect and the special effect and the specific effect and the post-effect can be enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-12 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect that changes the specific character into a special mode after the special effect executed in the specific effect.
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second aspect is executed after the post-effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, the jackpot notification before the post-effect A is defeated. The character image 018SGX1Z in which the enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display is displayed (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)), and in the SP reach effect D, the attacked enemy character X-2 is displayed in the post-effect B. The special image 018SGXZ that disappears after being skipped and becomes a star is displayed (see Fig. 13-19 (G1-5))).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the mode of the specific effect, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-13 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11 or Form 3-12.
It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the post-effect during the variable display period in which the variable display of 1 is executed.
In the post-effect, game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state notified to be controlled by the specific effect related to the post-effect is notified (for example, SP). The execution period of "post-effects A and B" in reach α, β, and γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the SP reach effects A to E. From the timing ta5 where the fixed decoration symbol which is the predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification, the timing ta7 where the fixed decoration symbol which is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends) (The part that is said to be (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the attention to the post-production in which the game value information is notified, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Form 3-14 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11 or Form 3-12.
It is a gaming machine that is informed that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display and is controlled to the advantageous state.
The effect executing means can execute the ex-post effect when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is In the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination in the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects A to E is temporarily stopped. From the displayed timing ta5 to the timing ta7 (ta5 to ta7) where the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to recognize the timing when the post-production is executed, so that the attention to the post-production can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 3-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-14.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the gaming value imparted to the first advantageous state is larger than that of the first advantageous state.
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific effect of the second aspect is executed than when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed (for example, SP in a low base state). When the SP reach effect B is executed when the reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the “big hit B (6R)” (first advantageous state) is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit A (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled to (2 advantageous states) is 30%, and when the SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, “big hit B (6R)” (No. 1). The ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than (1 advantageous state), is 40%),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to whether the specific effect is executed in the first aspect or the second aspect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-15.
When the specific effect is executed in the first aspect, the effect executing means can execute the ex-post effect in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, the post-effect A of the SP reach effect A). Then, since the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the post-effect A. In the post-effect A of the SP reach effects B and C, the character appears in the SP reach effects B and C. The part where the character does not appear in the post-production A),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the post-effect is executed even when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-16.
It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect during the variable display of 1.
The variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the second aspect is shorter than the variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the first aspect.
The period from the end of the special effect to the derivation display of the variable display result in the specific effect of the second aspect is that the variable display result is derived after the special effect is completed in the specific effect of the first aspect. Longer than the period until display (for example, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ <SP reach). β), the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the “movable body effect” ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 where the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is in the SP reach β. It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ> SP) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends to the timing ta7 (ta4 to ta7) when the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Reach β)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the specific effect of the second aspect executed in the short variable display period, the period after the end of the special effect is lengthened to enhance the impression of the variable display even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of Form 3-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-17.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A specific effect for notifying whether or not the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect executed when the specific effect is notified to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-execution performed after the special effect. The effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effects A to E, the movable body effect, and the post-effects A and B) is provided.
The effect executing means is
Whether or not a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) and a special character (friendly character A-1) are displayed as the specific effect and the specific character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state. The first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D) for notifying the above, and the special character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1) different from the specific character are displayed and the special character is displayed. A second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) for notifying whether or not the special character is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character displayed in the first specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, whereby the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to execute the first post-production (for example, post-production B) that notifies the game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be released) that can specify the magnitude of the game value given in.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, the special character displayed in the second specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, whereby the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to execute a second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) that notifies the game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be released) that can specify the magnitude of the game value given in.
At least, the operation mode of the special character is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by using a common character for the specific effect and the ex-post effect, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the relationship between the specific effect and the post-effect can be easily understood, so that the effect can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of Form 3-19 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-18.
The execution period of the second post-effect is the same as the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, all the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E are all. Common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period, it is possible to easily divert the control data of the ex post facto effect, particularly the motion control data of the special character, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced. ..

The gaming machine of Form 3-20 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-18 or Form 3-19.
The effect executing means can make the light emitting body emit light in the post-effect.
The light emitting pattern of the light emitting body is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the movable body LEDs 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball ejection addition part of the post-effect B). The light emission pattern is common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the light emission pattern can be made common, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-20.
The effect executing means can display a background image in the post-effect, and the effect execution means can display a background image.
The background image is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E. (See FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the background image can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-21.
The special character is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the ally character A-1 is a post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and a post-effect B of the SP reach effect E. Common (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the special character can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-22.
The effect executing means is
In the first post-production, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at a common time.
In the second post-effect, the special character and the special character can be displayed at a common time (for example, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 The image of fighting with is displayed at the same time, and the image of fighting the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 is displayed at the same time in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E (FIG. 13-18). -See Fig. 13-19)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since each character is displayed at the same time, the impression of the ex post effect can be enhanced and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-23.
The post-production production period includes a first production period and a second production period after the first production period.
The effect executing means is
In the first effect period, the suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state notified that it is controlled by the specific effect related to the post-effect and the magnitude of the game value to be added to the suggestion display. (For example, the planned number of balls to be added is displayed according to the attack of the enemy character by the ally character appearing in the SP reach effects D and E).
In the second effect period, the added game value obtained by adding the magnitude of the game value shown in the addition display to the game value shown in the suggestion display is added to the game value given in the advantageous state. (For example, after the ally character gives the last blow to the enemy character, the planned number of balls is stopped and displayed, and after the planned number of balls is notified, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination is displayed. Scheduled ball launch notification part where the stop display is displayed and the variable display ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the ex-post effect, the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed is notified, so that the effect of the ex-post effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of Form 3-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-24.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A specific effect for notifying whether or not the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect executed when the specific effect is notified to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-execution performed after the special effect. The effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effects A to E, the movable body effect, and the post-effects A and B) is provided.
The advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, "big hit A (6R)" in the low base state / "big hit B (6R)" in the high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A second advantageous state (for example, "big hit B (6R)" in the low base state / "big hit C (10R)" in the high base state) is included.
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D), a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) having an effect mode different from that of the first specific effect, the first specific effect, and the first specific effect It is possible to execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A), which is different from the second specific effect.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the first ex-post effect (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-1) of the effect mode related to the first specific effect appears. Post-production B) can be executed,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, a second ex-post effect (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-2) of an effect mode related to the second specific effect appears. Post-production B) can be executed,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the third specific effect, the third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the third specific effect can be executed.
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the first specific effect, the second specific effect, or the third specific effect is executed (for example, SP reach γ jackpot variation in a high base state). When the pattern is determined, the ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is SP reach. It is 40% when the effect D is executed and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed. When the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, “big hit A (6R)”. The ratio controlled by the "big hit B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the (first advantageous state), is 100% when the SP reach effect A is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only is it notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, but also the ratio of being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which specific effect is executed. The degree of attention of the player can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-26 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-25.
While the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production are common,
The effect period of the third post-effect is different from the effect period of the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the execution period (ta5 to) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C. All ta7) are common, and while the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to each of SP reach effects D and E is common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" is common. ) And the execution period (15 seconds) of "Post-production B"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by making the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production common, it is possible to easily standardize the production content and control between the first post-production and the second post-production. It is possible to reduce the cost, and by executing the third post-production with different production periods, it is possible to prevent the post-production from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the post-production. ..

The gaming machine of Form 3-27 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-25 or Form 3-26.
The effect executing means can make the light emitting body emit light in the post-effect.
While the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the first post-effect is common to the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the second post-effect, while
The light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the third post-effect is different from the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the post-post corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E). While the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled launch notification part of the production B are common, the post-production corresponding to the SP reach production A is performed. The movable body LED 208 of A, the light emitting patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 (light emitting patterns LP4-2, LP4-3), and the movable body LED 208 in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E. A portion different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12; see FIG. 13-6).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by making the light emission pattern of the first post-effect and the light emission pattern of the second post-effect common, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost and the third post-effect with different light emission patterns. By executing the production, the effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and the movable piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable piece is a winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is in the closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the movable piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting winning). It is also said that the mouth is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the effect. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball ejection rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. If the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy / high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy / high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy / low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power supply switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. It should be noted that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the ball ejection rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball ejection rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the ball ejection rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to the setting. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and turning off the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature unit 069SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 069SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-64. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the feature unit 069SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", and "normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "super reach". May be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the feature units 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". Further, a configuration having the same function as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Embodiment 1]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the feature unit 069SG will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) in which the ratio of displaying the jackpot display result is different. This is described as a gaming machine that is not configurable and has a jackpot probability of about 1/319.

Further, even if the variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) in a low accuracy state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the big hit occurs. When the next big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (also referred to as relief time saving state or relief time saving) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , In this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is controlled among a plurality of types of jackpots, the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A (low accuracy / high base state) among the plurality of types of time saving states. While the variable display number from the end of the time reduction state A to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 790 times remaining, if it is controlled by either the jackpot B or the jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots, the probability change state (high accuracy). Since the variable display is performed 110 times in the / high base state), the remaining 900 variable display times from the end of the probability change state to the arrival of the relief time reduction. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display number of times in the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes “0” is 1100 times.

In the present embodiment, in the variable display when the relief time reduction is reached, the shutter image (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) (C)) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so that the variation before the relief time reduction is reached. In the display, after reducing the visibility of the first background image (see FIG. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state displayed as the background image, the third background image corresponding to the relief time reduction as the background image. (See FIG. 11-23 (D)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in the left game area where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is formed. It is formed in the right game area where the game ball can flow down. The game ball weakly launched by the launcher flows down the first path in the left game area, and the game ball strongly launched by the launcher flows down the second path in the right game area.

In the present embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening along the flow direction of the game ball. The first big prize opening is an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter by driving the opening and closing of the big prize opening door (not shown) by driving the solenoid 069SG2A (see Fig. 11-2). It is possible to change to the state. The second big winning opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 069SG2B (see Fig. 11-3) to open and close the big winning opening door (not shown), so that the game ball can enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to the state.

Further, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the first large winning opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the second large winning opening. There is.

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area (first path) can win a prize in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right gaming area (second path). ) Flows down to the second start winning opening, the general winning opening 10, and the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. At the same time, it is possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

The switch circuit 110 in the present embodiment is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area cannot win the first starting winning opening. There is.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the variable display of the first special figure can be executed at a predetermined position of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the lower left position of the gaming area) in the present embodiment. 1 Special symbol display device 069SG004A, 2nd special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying 1st hold storage number, 2nd hold storage number can be displayed. 2nd hold display 069SG025B, normal symbol display 069SG020 that can execute variable display of normal symbols, normal figure hold display 069SG025C that can display the number of normal symbol hold storage, number of rounds of the big hit game during the big hit game ( Round display 069SG131 capable of displaying (big hit type), big hit game state, high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), etc. Right-handed lamp 069SG132 that lights up in the state, probability change lamp 069SG133 that lights up in the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) and low probability / high base state (time saving state) A game information display unit is provided in which the time-saving lamps 069SG134 that are lit are collectively arranged. The right-handed lamp 069SG132 is exceptionally lit from the timing when the variable display is stopped when the variable display result is a big hit in the case where the gaming state is the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In the present embodiment, the V winning opening and the discharging port on the downstream side of the V winning opening are provided in the second large winning opening. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second large winning opening can pass through the V winning opening when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and the V winning opening when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that it cannot pass through and flows down to the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 069SG023B1 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through a V winning opening provided downstream of the second major winning opening via a switch circuit 110. And a discharge switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the discharge port are provided.

Further, the vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and the movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the effect control board 12. Further, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED069SG031 for encouraging right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that lights up during the variable display. The second special drawing LED069SG033, the first holding LED069SG034A that lights up when the first holding storage number is 1 to 2, and the first holding LED069SG034B that lights up when the first holding storage number is 3 to 4. , The second holding LED069SG035A that lights up when the second holding storage number is 1 to 2, the second holding LED069SG035B that lights up when the second holding storage number is 3 to 4, and the push button 31B are built in. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected to each other.

FIG. 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determining the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), but the present invention is not limited thereto. The range of each random number value MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and ordinary symbols. A variation pattern determination table or the like that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns as an embodiment is stored.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 069SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 069SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 069SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1 / 319.68 in the feature unit 069SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher (in the feature section 069SG). About 1 / 80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

In addition to the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 7, the determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1). In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), the variation pattern determination table, the normal map display result determination table (not shown), and the normal map variation pattern. A decision table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) does not change according to the set value, but the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) is configured according to the set value. ) May change.

(Big hit type judgment table)
11-3 (C1) and 11-3 (C2) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, in which the time saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state, are provided. Further, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are maximum after the end of the jackpot game by winning the V winning slot after the game ball wins the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probabilistic control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In the present embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (for example, 0.1 second) in which the open state is short and a long open state in which the open state is long. There is a state (eg, 15 seconds). In the jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. And.

In the big hit game state by "Big hit A", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit A", it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V winning opening because the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round, and the probability variation control may be executed. You can't expect it, so it's a real normal jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit B", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit B", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control may be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit C", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit C", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are two or less or two or less. Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. After the jackpot game is over, both probability variation control and time saving control are performed. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state, so that the probability change control is performed after the big hit game is completed. And time saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even if the jackpot is A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in the short open state, but it is extremely rare. Therefore, if the jackpot is A, It will be described as assuming that the probability change control is not executed without winning the V prize. Further, even in the case of big hit B and big hit C, it is extremely rare that V prize is not given when the V lid is in the long open state, so it becomes big hit B and big hit C. If this is the case, it will be described as assuming that the V prize is won and the probability variation control is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as a jackpot type for the second special symbol, a mode having jackpots B and C capable of executing 110 times probability variation control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D or the like in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (probability change state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be provided. By doing so, the next big hit will be rich, so the interest will be improved, and even if the probability change control is completed without the big hit occurring in the 110 times probability change state after the end of the big hit D, the time saving state A (low). After executing 899 variable displays without a big hit (probability / high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) described later by only executing one variable display in the normal state. Therefore, the interest is improved.

(Number of time reductions)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when the jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not win in the probability variation region, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability is low. It is controlled to the time saving state A in which the control is performed 110 times (in this example, the battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) is performed 110 times. When a prize is won, (1) the time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability change control is performed 110 times (in this example, the pole battle rush (pole / BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time saving). In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by the jackpot in the low accuracy state, (1) the time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the low accuracy control is 1100. It is controlled by the time saving state B (in this example, 1100 play / 1100 battle rush (play / 1100 BATTLE RUSH)) performed once. However, after the end of the time saving state B, it is controlled to a big hit in a low accuracy state. Even if the fluctuation is performed 900 times again without being performed, the time saving state B is not controlled again based on this.

In the normal state, when the missed symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed, (1) time reduction control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed 1100 times. Time reduction state B (in this example, time reduction). It may be controlled by 1100 times of play / 1100 battle rush). In this case, even if the missed symbol with the time reduction is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), the transition control of the gaming state is not performed (the time reduction state is not controlled to the time reduction number of 1100 times). This is because it does not reduce the degree of relief of the player. For example, if the player is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 1100 times of time-saving based on the stop display of the missed symbol with time-saving when it is controlled to the probable change state that tends to be a big hit, the player. It is not preferable because it controls from a state that is favorable to the user to a state that is disadvantageous to the user. Therefore, only when the gaming state controlled when the missed symbol with the time reduction is stopped and displayed is the normal state, it may be configured to control the time reduction state to the time reduction state of 1100 times.

The relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.

K = {(1-ML) ^ n} x 100
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable number of impressions)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.9%. In the case of a gaming machine in which a set value can be set, if the set value with a low jackpot probability has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability. can do.

(Variation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 11-5, (A) is a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 2, and (B) is variation for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 3. A specific example of the pattern determination table, and (C) a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach B, and SP reach A is assigned. Two determination values are assigned, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B, and SP reach A. Two determination values are assigned to SP reach B, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to B not via SP, and SP 40 determination values are assigned to reach A, and 50 determination values are assigned to SP reach B.

Further, in FIGS. 11-6, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic state, and (B) is for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table of (C) is shown, and (C) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 2 to SP reach C. Is assigned, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 85 determination values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A, which is non-reach. Ten determination values are assigned to reach A, two determination values are assigned to SP reach C, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0, five determination values are assigned to A without SP, and SP reach C. 80 determination values are assigned to SP reach D, and 15 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

Further, in FIGS. 11-7, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state A, and (B) is the case of loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a jackpot is shown, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 5 to SP reach E. Judgment value is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), 90 judgment values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A in the variation pattern judgment table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, and the non-reach is non-reach. Five determination values are assigned to reach A, and five determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, five determination values are assigned to the SP non-via A, and the SP 95 determination values are assigned to reach E.

Further, in FIGS. 11-8, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) shows the number of reserved storages being 1 to 1. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss in the case of No. 3 and (C) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 3 to SP reach D. Judgment value is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach, and the SP Three determination values are assigned to reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic state is about 8.2 seconds {((((). 7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. Is about 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Here, assuming that the probabilistic change state is started and the hold storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the hold storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 variable displays, it is for the deviation that can be determined in the probabilistic state. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the probabilistic state is about 51.1 seconds {(( Since (22s × 5) + (55s × 80) + (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined in the probabilistic state is about 51. .1 second.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state A is about 9.15 seconds {(( (7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about 5.55. Seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Here, assuming that the time saving state A is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 times variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable display time for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the time saving state A is about 62.8 seconds { ((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state B is about 7.54 seconds {(( (7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about 2.205. Seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Here, assuming that the time saving state B is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 1100 variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.25 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot that can be determined in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds.

As described above, the number of fluctuation patterns for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is 3 in the probability variation state, 2 in the time saving state A, and 2 in the time saving state B, and the number of holding storages is 1 to 1. In the case of 3, the number of deviation patterns that can be determined is four in the probability variation state, three in the time saving state A, and two in the time saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the determinable deviation pattern is 4.83 seconds for the probable change state, 5.58 seconds for the time reduction state A, and 2.2 seconds for the time reduction state B.

Further, the number of fluctuation patterns for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is 3 in the probability variation state, 2 in the time saving state A, and 1 in the time saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the determinable jackpot variation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the probabilistic state, 62.8 seconds in the time saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time saving state B.

That is, the number of types of determinable loss variation patterns decreases in the order of probabilistic change state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probability change state> time saving state A> time saving state B), and the determinable loss variation variation pattern is variable. The average display time is shortened in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B).

In addition, the types of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined decrease in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B), and the determinable jackpot variation pattern is variably displayed. The average time is shortened in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B). As described above, the time saving state B has fewer fluctuation pattern types and the variable display period of 1 is shorter than that of the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A. That is, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

The number of types of variation patterns for loss and the number of types of variation patterns for big hits that can be determined exemplify a form in which the probability variation state is larger than the time reduction state A, but the time reduction state A is larger than the probability variation state. It may be the same in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A.

Further, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-8 are commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in the time saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the first start winning is generated in the time saving state B, Compared to the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the number of variable pattern types that can be determined is small, and the average time of the variable display time is short, so that monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

It should be noted that different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

If a V prize is generated in the big hit game state by "big hit A", the probability change control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game state as in the case of "big hit B" and "big hit C". Since it is controlled, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. Further, when the V prize is not generated in the big hit game state by "big hit B" or "big hit C", the time saving state A in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state as in "big hit A". Therefore, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-7. That is, the variation pattern determination table does not use the variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type, and an irregular state may occur in the jackpot gaming state, so that the state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is linked. The fluctuation pattern judgment table is used.

That is, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), V If a V prize occurs in a big hit game state where a prize can be won, it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, while when a V prize does not occur in a big hit game state where a V prize can be won, the said In the case where the V winning is not generated in the big hit gaming state where it is controlled to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state and the V winning is difficult, the second time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. The first time saving state and the second time saving state are common time saving states, and the variable display period of 1 in the first time saving state and the second time saving state is the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B of the present embodiment. It is preferably shorter than the period.

(Variation pattern without reach)
In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns without reach (“shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B”, “ultra-shortened non-reach”, “non-reach A, non-reach B”, “SP non-via A, SP non-reach” “Via B”) is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variable display result is “missing” or “big hit” after the variable display is started is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-reach A, SP non-reach B" are simply "non-reach" or "non-reach" Also called "non-reach fluctuation pattern". In addition, "SP non-via A, SP non-via B" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for a big hit, which is a big hit without establishing reach or SP reach.

In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns without reach, the variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach A" is 7000 ms, and it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "SP non-via A". The variable display period in the case is 7000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when determined to be a “non-reach B” variation pattern is 12000 ms, and the variable display period is determined to be a “SP non-via B” variation pattern. Is 12000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "shortened non-reach A" is 3000 ms, and the variable display period when determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "shortened non-reach B" is 5000 ms. , The variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened non-reach" is 1500 ms. Of these, the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened non-reach" is a variation pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, and is controlled to another gaming state (time saving state A, probability changing state) in which the time saving control is executed. The variable display period is shorter than any of the fluctuation patterns determined in.

(Variation pattern with super reach)
In the present embodiment, the reach state is established in the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“SP reach A”, “SP reach B”, “SP reach C”, “SP reach D”, “SP reach E”). Later, as the SP reach effect, a bowling effect (SP reach A) that informs whether or not the ally character and the enemy character have won the big hit by bowling, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character. A battle effect (SP reach B to E) for notifying whether or not a big hit has been won is executed, and the final display result is fixedly stopped after the bowling effect and the battle effect are completed. Here, when the final display result is "missing", the effect of defeating the ally character to the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is "big hit", the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character (victory effect) is executed, or the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. After the execution, the effect (revival effect) in which the ally character revives and wins the enemy character is executed.

The "variable pattern without reach" is a variable pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without changing the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to a predetermined reach mode. In addition, even if there is a reach fan such as "reach notice" described later, it includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is finally displayed without the reach mode. Further, the "variable pattern with super reach" means that the display result is displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, the reach effect is developed, and the SP reach effect is executed. It is a fluctuation pattern.

Further, the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (SP reach A to E) is given in the jackpot game state after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed and the victory effect and the resurrection effect of the variable display part are completed. It includes a post-production part that informs the planned number of balls to be identifiable.

The variable display period of the variable display part is 45,000 ms for SP reach A, 80,000 ms for SP reach B, 40,000 ms for SP reach C, 25,000 ms for SP reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP reach E, for each type of SP reach A to E. It's different. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-production part is 15,000 ms, which is common to SP reach A to E. In the present embodiment, the post-production part is assigned a predetermined period (for example, 15,000 ms) in the variable display period, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. Further, the fanfare period in the big hit game state may be assigned to the post-production part.

In the present embodiment, all the fluctuation patterns accompanied by reach are regarded as super reach fluctuation patterns, and an embodiment in which a normal reach fluctuation pattern is not set is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach fluctuation is not limited to this. A pattern may be set.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 11-9 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" ("missing with time reduction"). Different EXT data are set according to (preliminary determination result) or the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is a big hit.

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result.

Command 8FXH stops (confirms) the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a symbol confirmation specification command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until it is executed.

In the symbol confirmation designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command in which the change of the special symbol ends and the symbol confirmation period becomes 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the change of the special symbol is completed and the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds.

In the present embodiment, (i) the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed, and (ii) the relief time reduction is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit, and the relief time reduction arrival variation. In, a symbol confirmation specification command in which different EXT data is set is transmitted. Specifically, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed, the symbol confirmation A designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted. Further, (ii) when the relief time reduction is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, the symbol confirmation B designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time reduction notification command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number in the time reduction state (time reduction state A) excluding the relief time reduction. The command E2XXH is a remaining probability change number notification command for notifying the remaining probability change control number in the probability change state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED turn-off notification command for notifying the turn-off of the right-handed LED069SG031.

The command 91XXH is a command for designating the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the relief time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number and designating the value at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction count specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), each place (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3 digits) of the relief time reduction counter value (4 digit value) at the time of power restoration. Different EXT data are set according to the 4th and 4th digits).

In the recovery time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), the commands 9100H to 910FH specify the first digit of the recovery time reduction number value, and the recovery time reduction number specification 1 command. Is. The commands 9110H to 911FH are two commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions. The commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions. The commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the fourth digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions.

The command 94XXH is a command for designating the number of relief time reductions, and is an effect control command for designating the remaining variable display number (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In the relief time reduction command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data are set according to the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. ..

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the relief time reduction has been reached. The command 9401H is a rescue time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a rescue time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached.

The command 96XXH is a command for designating the number of times of relief time reduction 2, and is an effect control command for designating the remaining variable display number of times (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time reduction is set is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining variable display count until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display count is 700 times, the relief time is reduced. The command 9607H is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of time reductions. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo display designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the present embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining variable display times until the relief time is shortened. , The value obtained by converting the value of the current relief time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number is set, and the recovery time reduction number designation command is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to set a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter and transmit the relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions is transmitted, and the remaining variable display up to the current relief time reduction is displayed. You will be notified of the number of times.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery and a command for specifying the number of times of relief time are transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. ..

Further, when the RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the relief time reduction counter is also included in the initialization process of step S8. Clear processing is executed for the included area.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if a big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times after the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state B is controlled. Will be done. In this example, since the effect control command instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9 and the initial value (“900”) set in the relief time reduction counter correspond to each other, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the instruction control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (it is "900" in this example), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into a hexadecimal number, and sets the recovery time reduction time reduction. Control is performed to send the number of times designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until the relief time is shortened.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state of continuation of the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is configured not to be initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When the error is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Time saving flag, probability change flag)
In the present embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, clearing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when the time saving state A via the jackpot A is controlled. This time saving flag A is set when the big hit gaming state of the big hit A ends, and when the time saving state A ends (the timing when the big hit occurs during the time saving state A, the 110 times time saving control ends and the normal state ends. It is erased at the timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving is controlled. This time saving flag B is set to 900 variable displays in which the display result does not become a jackpot symbol when the display result is executed 900 times variable display from the RAM clear, or in a low accuracy state after the jackpot game state ends. Is set when is executed, and is erased when the time saving state B ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B, the timing when the 1100 times time saving control ends and the time saving state is controlled to the normal state, etc.). ..

The probability change flag is set when the probability change state is controlled. In the present embodiment, when the V prize is won in the first round of the big hit game, the probability change flag is set as the game state is controlled to the probability change state when the big hit game ends. This probability change flag is cleared at the timing when the probability change state ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the probability change state, the timing when the 110th probability change control is executed and controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, when the probability change flag is determined to be YES in step 069SGS69A of FIG. 11-12 described later, the probability change flag is erased based on the 110th time since the variable display is controlled to the probability change state.

(Special design normal processing)
11-11 and 11-12 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the second reserved storage is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 069SGS54).

In the present embodiment, by executing the processes of steps 069SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. And store it in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 performs the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for the low probability. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the case of a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a big hit determination using the big hit determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 069SGS64), and the CPU 103 is for type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number is determined as the big hit type (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted to become "0". That) is configured to occur. In this example, the time saving state A is based on the fact that the jackpot A is reached, and the time saving state is based on the fact that the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display of a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) is completed. Although it is controlled by B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction condition is satisfied becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction condition is satisfied becomes a big hit, it is configured to control to the time reduction state A based on the big hit.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time reduction state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 069SGS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 069SGS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state is terminated at the end of the variable display (step 069SGS69).

In this example, a case is shown in which steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed before the variable display count processing up to the relief time reduction after step 069SGS71 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the variable display number up to the relief time reduction after step 069SGS71. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "110" in the time reduction counter (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the subtraction is performed, in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Further, it may be configured to set "111", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, when the process of step 069SGS69A is executed, the process after step 069SGS70 (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) is not performed when the game state is in the probable change state. In this example, even if the variable display is executed during the pole / battle rush), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not subtracted. If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-probability change state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In the present embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process shifts to step 069SGS84 without executing the processing after step 069SGSS70. However, the probability change flag is not limited to this. If is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated, the relief time reduction number designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction count counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 at this point, the timing after being already controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the relief time reduction (whether it is controlled to the time reduction state B or the time reduction state B). This is the timing in which the normal state is controlled after the fluctuation is performed 1100 times), and the big hit that is the trigger for setting 900 in the relief time reduction counter is not generated. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data and produces a relief time reduction specification command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 947EH as the relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state B is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 069SGS75). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and issues a command 957FH as a relief time reduction designation command for effect control. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 has the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 069SGS77). Whether or not the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100 times can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and produces a command for specifying the relief time reduction number 2. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the remaining variable display times up to the relief time reduction, and sends a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the remaining variable display number of times until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect and the countdown effect described later.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (“900” is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time is configured to be continuously generated, only when the relief time is shortened for the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number specification command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, and it is configured not to send the relief time reduction number specification command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command when the relief time is shortened after the second time. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to be the jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be the jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "3". If it is decided and it is decided to be a big hit C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is decided to be out of the way, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 069SGS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step 069SGS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability change flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state if it is set. Clear the time reduction counter of (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display of 900 times is executed in the low probability state after the big hit game is completed. Is a relief time reduction and is controlled to the time reduction state B.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 069SGS135, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the first large winning opening 069SG007A and the second large winning opening 069SG007B are controlled to be in the open state. (Step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time reduction flag B and controls the time reduction state (step 069SGS171A). .. Then, "1100" is set in the time reduction counter (step 069SGS172).

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). Further, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step). 069SGS174B). After that, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state B at the timing when the relief time is shortened, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state B may be controlled at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and the relief time reduction counter may be set (“900” is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

Further, in this example, "900" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode, although the case where the relief time is shortened is shown. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "900". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a relief time reduction.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS172, 1100 times, which is a value larger than the variable display number (900 times) until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, in step 069SGS172, the same value as "900" or a smaller value may be set in the time reduction counter.

Further, in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured so as to be set in the time reduction number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "110" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "1100" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 110 times with a probability of 10% and 1100 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to B) and ends the time saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed LED turn-off notification command for notifying the turn-off of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process of steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed to shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification in the time saving final variation. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the time saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-15 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the probability variation state and the jackpot A occurs. Is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via big hit (low accuracy / high base state)). Although not shown, even when the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. In addition, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit does not occur. When the variable display count reaches 900 times, or after the end of 110 variable display in (Q) (Q-1) time saving state A, the variable display count reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low accuracy / high base state)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the probabilistic state (high probability / high base state), when either the jackpot B or the jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probabilistic region, the probabilistic state is restored again. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the jackpot B or the jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the probability variation state is reached. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display of 110 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is performed to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the jackpot B or the jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the probability variation state is reached. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display of 1100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is performed to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit does not occur. When the variable display count reaches 900 times, or after the end of 110 variable display in (Q) (Q-1) time saving state A, the variable display count reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the relief time saving).

In this example, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state B and the game ball does not win a prize in the probable change area, the game ball uniformly shifts to the time saving state A, but only in such a control mode. I can't. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time reduction with the number of time reductions corresponding to the case where the game ball does not win in the probability variation area (110 times in this example), and the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger. For example, it may be configured to continue the current time saving state B as it is.

In this example, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the probabilistic state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. 1 The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

(Explanation of play time)
Next, the characteristics of the "play time", which is the time saving state B (relief time saving state) in the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. 11-16 are diagrams showing an example in the case where "play time" is not installed in (A1) and (A2), and are diagrams showing an example in the case where "play time" is installed in (B1) and (B2). 11-17 are diagrams showing an example of the deviation fluctuation in the normal state in FIGS. 11 to 17 (A) to (D). 11-18 are explanatory diagrams of play time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state in (E1) and (E2), and are explanatory diagrams of the play time in the present case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state in (F1) to (F4). Is. In FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18, for convenience of explaining the feature of "play time", an explanatory image different from the effect image described below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine not equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A1) and 11-16 (A2), after the end of the big hit, a low probability state (for example, normal) Variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, about 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot in the state (low probability / low base state)) Even if it is broken, it is not controlled by the "play time", that is, the time saving state. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play the game without a jackpot for a long time, and the investment is also large. However, this normal state (low accuracy / low base state) continues until a big hit occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's willingness to play.

On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (B1) and 11-16 (B2), after the end of the big hit, a low probability state (for example, a normal state (low)) When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot (probability / low base state)), it becomes the "play time" and becomes a specific number of times (for example). For example, it will be controlled to the time saving state B over the variable display of up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator, such as 1100 times. At this point, the probability of a big hit is already about three times higher, so the player has been playing the game for a long time without a big hit, and the investment is considerably large. However, by controlling the "play time", that is, the time saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a big hit is increased, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues to play the game without a big hit for a period from the end of the big hit to being controlled by the "play time". ("I'm addicted"), during that period, various notices are being performed and continued to be fueled. Further, when the variable display is 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first time (for example, 105 times) after the end of the big hit (see FIG. 11-17 (A)), the variable display is performed the second time (see FIG. 11-17 (A)). For example, when it is executed 213 times (see FIG. 11-17 (B)) and when the variable display is executed a third time (for example, 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17 (C)), the variable display is displayed. When the fourth number of times (for example, 882 times) is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (D)), at least an effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as SP reach (for example, an SP reach effect of "super heat") is specified. It has been executed many times, and all of these SP reach effects continue to fall off, so it is highly possible that they are quite depressed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (E1) and 11-18 (E2), even when the "play time" (time saving state B) is finally controlled via the variable display 900 times, this time saving state B is normally set. When the fluctuation efficiency is low as in the state (low accuracy / low base state), the number of wasted balls increases, and further additional investment and prolongation of the game can be considered. In addition, since the SP reach effect is completely removed in the variable display of 900 times, it is quite depressing, so if the fanning effect occurs frequently even in the "play time", the motivation for playing will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment has higher fluctuation efficiency than the normal state (low accuracy / low base state). Because it is in a short time state, it is possible to continue the game while suppressing additional investment. Further, in the time saving control, the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, which is about 3.8 times the jackpot probability at the maximum), so that the jackpot is controlled during the period controlled by the time saving state B. Since there is a high probability (for example, about 97%), you can play the game with confidence. For example, when the jackpot probability is 1 / 319.9, the probability of not being a jackpot in one variable display is about 99% {(319.9-1) ÷ 319.9 = 0.996874}, and 1100 rotations. The probability of not being a big hit within is about 3% (0.996874 ^ 1100 = 0.031937). Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit within 1100 rotations is about 97% (1-0.031937 = 0.968063).

Furthermore, in "play time", since the variable display period of the selected fluctuation pattern is short, the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, so it is possible to efficiently digest the out-of-order variable display and draw a big hit in a short period of time. In an advantageous state where there is a high possibility that a big hit (for example, big hit B or big hit C) that is advantageous to the player will be given by becoming a big hit in the second special figure game by the right-handed game. be. In addition, it is difficult to execute the advance notice effect and the SP reach effect, which will be described later, and there is little chance of being fanned by the off-line effect, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suitably suppressed. That is, the "play time" of the present embodiment is different from the game state in which the player waits for the next big hit while enjoying the effect, such as the probabilistic state or the time saving state A, and the fluctuation is different from the enjoyment of the effect. It is a game state that gives priority to efficiently digesting and allocating the next big hit. The details of the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment will be described below.

(Battle Rush)
In the present embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to "battle rush" when the time saving state A via the jackpot A is controlled. FIG. 11-19 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to “battle rush”.

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state A) and the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 110, the effect mode is ". A second background image 069SG320 showing the scenery of the city in the evening is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to "Battle Rush", and "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG221 composed of characters is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the value of the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, four second hold display 069SG002 are displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

It should be noted that the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the pending display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the time saving residual display 069SG201, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400. By displaying such items on the front side (upper layer) of the effect image such as a character, the effect images are duplicated to improve the visibility of the first hold storage number, the second hold storage number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, by displaying the decorative pattern on the back side (lower layer) of the effect image, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from overlapping and the visibility of the effect image from being reduced. You may do so.

The above small symbol is also referred to as a fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is constant in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as, for example, an image display device 5. It is variably displayed depending on the operation (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect is performed to shield the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol display provided in a place other than the image display device 5 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined place of the game board 2) such as the first special figure LED069SG032 and the second special figure LED069SG033. The symbol displayed on the device is also called the fourth symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A is completed, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state). In this case, the first background image 069SG310 showing the scenery of the city in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the image display device 5 is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen. The variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the character "game 0 times") corresponding to the variable display count is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG221 at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving residual display 069SG201 at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 100), the image. The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the display device 5 are erased.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less when controlled to a low accuracy / low base state (normal state), a countdown effect described later is executed, and the screen right of the image display device 5 is displayed. The special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "more XXX times", and the triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) are displayed at the lower part.

(Yu 1100 Battle Rush [Yu Time])
In the present embodiment, when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving, the effect mode is controlled to "play 1100 battle rush" (also referred to as "play time"). FIG. 11-19 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "play / 1100 battle rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state B) and the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 1100, the effect mode is ". Corresponding to the "Yu 1100 Battle Rush", the third background image 069SG330 showing the scenery of the city at night is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the "Yu" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", corresponding to the remaining variable display number controlled to the low accuracy / high base state, XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Regarding the time saving residual display 069SG201, the cost can be reduced because the display mode (for example, design, font, color, etc.) is common to the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), when the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed and then controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, The first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 1100) The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In the present embodiment, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, even if the variable display is executed 900 times without a big hit in the low accuracy state, the time saving is shortened. It is not controlled by the state B. Therefore, after the 110th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state described later, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing so, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, if the variable display is executed 900 times without a big hit in the low accuracy state, the time saving state is executed. It is possible to prevent B from thinking that it is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013 and the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG012 during the period controlled to the time saving state B. Although the embodiment in which the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 are displayed during the period controlled by the time saving state B. It may not be done. In the time saving state A or the probability change state, the active display 069SG003 or the second hold display 069SG002 may or may not be displayed.

Further, after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state A is completed, when the low accuracy / low base state is controlled, for example, a character such as "BATLE RUSH end" is displayed. Then, it may be controlled to a low accuracy / low base state. On the other hand, when the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed and then the low accuracy / low base state is controlled, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" as described above are displayed. It is preferable not to display.

Further, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, the shutter effect performed at the time of transition to the time saving state B ( (See FIG. 11-23 (B)) may be performed before controlling to a low accuracy / low base state.

Further, when the 101st variable display is started when the game state is controlled to the time reduction state A, a countdown notification suggesting that the number of time reductions is the remaining 10 times is performed, while the game state is the time reduction state. Even if the 1091st variable display when controlled by B starts, the countdown notification may not be performed. By doing so, the time saving state B (play time) is likely to end, but a fan is added. It can be prevented from being lost.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In the present embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to "extreme battle rush" when the probability change state is controlled via the jackpot B or the jackpot C. FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to “extreme battle rush”.

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) and the value of the time reduction counter is 11 to 110, the effect mode is "pole". The fourth background image 069SG340 showing the scenery of the wilderness in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the "battle rush", and the "pole BATTLE" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG223 composed of the characters "RUSH" is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "XX times remaining", XX = 11 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state and the value of the time reduction counter is 0 to 10, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. In the section, the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "remaining XX times", XX = 0 to 10) in an aspect expanded from the time saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time saving number counter is 11 to 110. ) Is displayed. The highlighted time-saving residual display 069SG201 is not limited to the enlarged mode of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Further, the dedicated sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speaker at the timing of switching from the time saving residual display 069SG201 to the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201.

Further, even in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the time saving residual display may be displayed in the same manner as in the probability change state. Further, regarding the time saving state B, the player may not be stressed by not displaying the emphasized time saving residual display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (C), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, the 110th variable display in which the display result is "missing" is executed. The result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 is given the characters "Pole / BATTLE RUSH end" to notify that the pole / battle rush has ended, and the characters "BONUS x 〇 times" to indicate the number of big hits (○ is the number of big hits). The characters "XXXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls (XXXXX is the total number of game balls given) are included.

The number of big hits included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive big hits based on the variable display in the high accuracy state (so-called number of consecutive villas), and the total number of given game balls is the number of consecutive villas. It includes the number of prize balls given in the big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), after 110 variable displays when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state are completed, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state. In this case, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the variable display number corresponding to the variable display number executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "game 0 times") is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG223 at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 and the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201 at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", X = 0 to 10). The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the gaming state is controlled from the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B to the normal state, a left-handed notification effect for instructing left-handedness may be executed based on the end of the time-saving control. In the left-handed notification effect, the left-handed notification image and the characters and arrow images of "left-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the voice of "please left-handed" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Will be done.

Further, after the 110th variable display when the time saving state A is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2) is completed, or after the time saving state B is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2). Both after the 1100th variable display is completed and after the 110th variable display is completed when the probability change state is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D). Variable display number display when control of low accuracy / low base state (normal state) is started By displaying the variable display number of 069SG202 as the common "0 times", the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (previous big hit). It is possible to make it difficult to easily grasp the type, which of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state was controlled, and to raise the expectation that the time-saving state B will be controlled.

When the control of the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) is started, the variable display number to be displayed on the variable display number display 069SG202 is "110 times" when the control of the time saving state A is completed. The variable display number executed in each state may be displayed, such as "1100 times" when the control of the time saving state B is completed and "110 times" when the control of the probabilistic state state is completed. By doing so, it is possible to roughly confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (whether it was controlled by the type of the previous jackpot, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability change state), thereby the time saving state B. Since it becomes easy to predict the variable number of times of display until it is controlled by, it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

Further, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a common music (for example, music A) is fixedly played as a BGM, and in the probabilistic state, a plurality of music including music A (for example, music A to X). One of them may be selectable, and the selected music may be playable.

Further, when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, and the like are emitted in a light emission pattern corresponding to the music A (a light emission pattern matching the rhyme of the music, etc.). You may do it.

Further, when the music A is played in the time saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. have a light emitting pattern (such as a light emitting pattern matching the background image) different from that when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. It may be made to emit light.
Further, the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 or the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state A or the probable change state (the pattern matching the rhyme of the music) is the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 or the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B. The light emission pattern is emphasized more than (the pattern matched to the background image), and the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B becomes a calm light emission pattern. The emphasized light emission pattern includes a pattern having higher brightness than a calm light emission pattern, a pattern in which the light emission data switching interval is short, a pattern in which the blinking cycle is short, and the like. By doing so, in the time saving state B, as explained in the above flow, the player may be depressed, so that the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 are overemphasized. By calming down, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Further, for example, a common background image is displayed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, but in the time saving state B, the perspective (visibility) of the background image is different from that of the time saving state A, so that the same background is displayed. Even if the image is diverted, it may be understood that the state is completely different (giving a different impression).

In addition, the size of the decorative pattern is also different between the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B (for example, the time-saving state A: normal, the time-saving state B: large), and even if the background image is diverted, the state is completely different. May be understood (impressive).

Further, after the probabilistic rush effect / time saving rush effect A is executed, the prepaid card may be displayed to prevent forgetting to take it or the game machine maker may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the prepaid card for forgetting to remove or display the gaming machine maker after the time saving rush effect B is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by performing the above display at the time of entering the time saving state B that does not go through the big hit.

(Variable display count display, special count display)
In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the game is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Variable display number display 069SG202 corresponding to the number of variable displays (in this example, characters such as "game XXX times") and special number display 069SG203 corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time is shortened (in this example) , "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" characters, "more XXX times" characters, triangular objects, etc.) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the special number of times display is referred to as a countdown effect.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the variable display number display or the special number display is displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. In addition, the display mode of the special number display can be changed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. FIG. 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the variable display number display or the special number display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 301 to 900, the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, "Game XXX" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters "times", XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) are displayed. The number (XXX) of the variable display count display 069SG202 is additionally displayed each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 31 to 300, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 in a white mode is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. (In this example, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white characters "more XXX times", and the white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 30, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 in a red mode is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, after the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red characters "more XXX times", and the red triangular object, XXX = 30) are enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), the figure is shown. As shown in 11-21 (D), the image display device 5 is moved to the lower right of the screen and displayed in a reduced size. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number display 069SG203 in a red mode is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH". The characters "up to", the red characters "more XXX times", and the red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special number display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is not limited to this. In the variable display when becomes 0, the special number display may be displayed. For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, when the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 is executed after the special number display in the red mode is displayed, the special number in the golden mode is displayed. The number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the golden characters "0 more times", the golden triangle object, etc.) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variable display number display 069SG202 is hidden during the period in which the special number display 069SG203 is displayed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and is variable. The special number display 069SG203 may be displayed while the display number display 069SG202 is displayed, and the addition display of the variable display number display 069SG202 and the subtraction display of the special number display 069SG203 may be executed along with the variable display. In this case, the variable display number display 069SG202 is displayed in a mode having lower visibility than the display mode of the special number display 069SG203 (for example, the variable display number display 069SG202 is displayed in a smaller size than the special number display 069SG203). (Indicated by) is preferable.

Further, the trigger for starting the display of the special number display 069SG203 is when the variable display in which the remaining variable display number until controlled by the time saving state B becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times) is started. It may be a fixed timing, the timing when the display start lottery of the special number display 069SG203 is executed and the winning, the timing when the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach loss ends, or until the time reduction state B is controlled. It may be an irregular timing, such as when it is suggested by the execution of the remaining number of times suggestion effect that the remaining variable display number has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times). Further, when the display of the special number display 069SG203 is started, the special number display 069SG203 may be highlighted by displaying it in full screen or the like. Further, instead of displaying the special number display 069SG203, it may be possible to execute a dedicated background effect for switching to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "extreme heat when reaching").

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 301 to 900, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern table in which it is more difficult to determine the SP reach fluctuation pattern than before the relief time reduction counter value is 301 to 900. You may. By doing so, it is possible to play with a variable display that captures the intention of the player who wants to quickly enter the relief time.

Further, during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full-screen display period), the execution of various advance notice effects described later may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). .. Further, when the execution time of the advance notice effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 may be displayed in a mode that is not highlighted, or a look-ahead notice described later. If the execution time of the effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 is displayed when the variable display after the pre-reading notice effect ends is started. When the display or the predetermined variable display in the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) becomes a big hit, the display of the special number display 069SG203 is restricted (for example, not displayed or conspicuous). It may be displayed in a non-existent manner).

(Example of production when the relief time is shortened)
As described above, (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed (when the relief time is reached without a big hit after the RAM is cleared), the symbol is confirmed in the relief time reduction arrival variation. When the symbol confirmation A designation command with a period of 0.5 seconds is sent, and (ii) the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit (one big hit, then the relief time is reached without a big hit. In the case of), a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted. In the present embodiment, since the symbol determination period is different between the case of (i) and the case of (ii), the low probability / high base state is reached after the relief time reduction arrival variation in the low probability / low base state is completed. The effect mode of the period (that is, the symbol determination period) until the rescue time-saving game is started under the control of (time-saving state B) is different.

Next, (i) an example of the effect when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25. In this example, (i) the case where the relief time is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed and the fluctuation pattern is “non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach” will be described.

(Example of production in case of (i))
FIG. 11-22 shows the execution of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be “non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach” when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear process is executed. It is a time chart showing the timing, and FIGS. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), the CPU 103 variablely displays the first special symbol (relief time reduction counter). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation A designation command at the timing of ending (variable display when the value is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 11-22) is the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("146" in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the hold display 069SG001 in the first hold display area 069SG011 based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 1. I'm letting you. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image of the decorative pattern based on the normal state of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved storage number is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved storage number is 0. ing. In addition, the combination of small symbols (“146” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the small symbol display area. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (in FIG. 11-22). (At the timing of T2 shown), the effect control CPU 120 executes a shutter effect, and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation A designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22). The control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, according to the end of the variable display, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and right-handed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in a fade-in manner. By doing so, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue the left-handed game and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, after displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 at the lower right of the screen, right-handed By displaying the broadcast image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 11-22). When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state), the effect control CPU 120 serves as a background image of the decorative pattern in response to the effect mode being set to "play 1100 battle rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving residual display 069SG201 (this) at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 1100) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the combination of the decorative symbols executed immediately before (“234” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") is displayed in the small symbol display area.

Next, (ii) an example of the effect when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25. In this example, (ii) the case where the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) off" will be described.

(Example of production in the case of (ii))
FIG. 11-24 shows when (A) is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach" when the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit. A time chart showing the execution timing of each effect of the above, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of the time saving rush effect B. FIG. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the effect configuration in FIGS. 11-25 (A) and 11-25 (B) is the "non-reach (shortened non-reach)" when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process shown in FIGS. 11-23 (A) and 11-23 (B). Since it is the same as the effect configuration in the variation pattern of "reach or non-reach) out of reach", the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 definitely stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, according to the end of the variable display, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the screen, the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in a fade-in manner. By doing so, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue the left-handed game and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, after displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 at the lower right of the screen, right-handed By displaying the broadcast image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation B designation command (in FIG. 11-24 (A)). (At the timing of T4 shown), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right-handed notification image 069SG401 while displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400. After the fade-out display, the time-saving rush effect B is executed, and the rush image 069SG473 (in this example, the image including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush") described later is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving rush effect B, the player is notified that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low accuracy / high base state) by displaying the rush image 069SG473 including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush". ing.

Further, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed in common with the inrush image 069SG470 which is displayed even when the control of the time saving state A and the probability change state is started, and the transmittance is 0% in the minimum size at the lower left of the display screen. It is composed of a play time image 069SG473A composed of the characters "1100" and a play time image 069SG473B composed of the characters "play".

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (E), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)). When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state), the effect control CPU 120 has a background image of a decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being "play 1100 battle rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed as. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving residual display 069SG201 (this) at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 1100) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the combination of the decorative symbols executed immediately before (“234” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") is displayed in the small symbol display area.

In the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B after the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed. , An example is shown in which the production mode is set to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. Seconds) may elapse and the effect mode may be set to "play 1100 battle rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B. For example, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the timing at which (A) the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, and (B) the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B are started. At the timing, the effect mode may be set to "play 1100 battle rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. Also, of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command, the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the symbol confirmation period specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command) has elapsed. At (in this example, the timing of T4), the time saving rush effect B (FIG. 11-25 (D)) is not executed, the effect mode is set to "play 1100 battle rush", and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. You may do so.

Further, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-25 (B), an image (for example, the character "play") suggesting that the shutter image 069SG250 is controlled to the time saving state B is displayed. It may be displayed. By doing so, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in common at the timing controlled by the time saving state B and the timing other than the timing controlled by the time saving state B (for example, the timing when the effect mode is switched). , It becomes easy to distinguish.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, relief is performed by (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared, and (ii) after the big hit, 900 times of variable display. Although the mode in which the effect mode is different is illustrated depending on the time when the time is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect common to the case of (i) and the time of (ii). May be executed. That is, the time-saving rush effect B may be executed between the time (i) and the time (ii), or the time-saving rush effect B may be executed between the time (i) and the time (ii). May not be executed. Further, the time saving rush effect B having different modes may be executed between the case of (i) and the time of (ii).

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, a mode in which the time saving rush effect B is executed during the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation B designation command is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving rush effect B may be started after being controlled to the time saving state B. Hereinafter, an example of modification of the execution timing of each effect when the relief time is shortened will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24 (B), 11-26, and 11-27.

FIG. 11-24 (B) is a time chart as a modification showing the execution timing of each effect when the relief time is reached. FIG. 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect operation when the number of reserved storages is 0 when the relief time reduction is reached.

First, since the effect configuration in FIGS. 11-26 (A) is the same as the effect configuration shown in FIG. 11-25 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (B), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (FIG. 11-24 (FIG. 11-24). (At the timing of T2 shown in B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) whose display result is “off” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition to displaying the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "right-handed", the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , Fade-in is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started.

Then, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the control of the time saving state B is started. The variable display can be started, but when the number of reserved storages is 0, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (E), the first variable display is started based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second start winning (or the first starting winning) is generated. At the timing (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (F), the effect control CPU 120 is at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display is completed (in FIG. 11-24 (B)). After ending the shutter effect (at the timing of T6 shown) and hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started.

Even if the time saving rush effect B is started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time saving state B (for example, in the middle of the first variable display or at the start of the second and subsequent variable displays). good. Further, when the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms) such that the ultra-shortened variable pattern is determined as the variable display variable pattern, the variable display may be continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving rush effect B is continuously displayed regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, if the variable display of the jackpot is started during the execution period of the time saving rush effect B, the executing time saving rush effect B is interrupted or terminated, and the effect according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach effect) is performed. It may be shifted, or the jackpot notification effect may be executed without going through the effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

Next, FIGS. 11-27 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect operation when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more when the relief time reduction is reached.

First, since the effect configurations in FIGS. 11-27 (A) to (C) are the same as the effect configurations shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) to (C), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) whose display result is “off” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition to displaying the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "right-handed", the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , Fade-in is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started.

Here, when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 11-24 (B)). Since the control of the time saving state B is started and the first variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (D), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and the image display device. The shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of 5. Further, the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (E), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display is completed, and the shutter image 069SG250 is used. After hiding the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving rushing effect B is started.

In this way, when the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation is completed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, and displays the image display device 5 on the display screen. Right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed to start right-handed notification. Therefore, the variable display is not started after the time reduction state B control is started, so that the time reduction state B control is performed. Even when the shutter effect indicating that the start is started or the time saving rush effect B is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from starting the disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time saving state B is controlled.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM, 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period, and when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, the symbol confirmation period is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM and after the big hit, the variable display is 900 times. A common symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set when the relief time is reached. Even in this case, the right-handed notification and the time saving rush effect B are controlled to the time saving state B by executing the variable display after the control of the time saving state B is started. It is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing it.

In the above embodiment, when the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image is displayed. An example is shown in which the display of the 069SG250 is finished and the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush is displayed. Here, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation A designation command, for example, when the symbol confirmation A designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or when the command of the symbol confirmation A designation command is garbled. If the received command cannot be recognized as the symbol confirmation A designation command, then (A) the timing when the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) after being controlled to the time saving state B, 1 Shutter at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the second variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variable pattern specification command, etc.) is received. You may end the production, end the display of the shutter image 069SG250, and display the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush. At the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect is terminated and the shutter is shuttered. The display of the image 069SG250 may be terminated and the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, 0.5 seconds of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command elapses when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit. An example is shown in which the shutter effect is terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated, and the time-saving rush effect is executed at the same timing. Here, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation B designation command, for example, when the symbol confirmation B designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or when the command of the symbol confirmation B designation command is garbled. If the received command cannot be recognized as the symbol confirmation B designation command, then (A) the timing when the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B. Shutter at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the second variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variable pattern specification command, etc.) is received. The effect may be ended, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time saving rush effect B may be executed. At the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect is terminated and the shutter is shuttered. The display of the image 069SG250 may be terminated and the time saving rush effect B may be executed.

Further, in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (shortened)" in the case where the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared and the case where the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit. Each effect performed when "non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach" was described, but although not shown in particular, the fluctuation pattern was determined to be "SP reach A out of line or SP reach B out of place". At that time, the SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type (for example, bowling effect for SP reach A, battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the bowling effect or battle effect. After displaying the image to be displayed and notifying that the variable display result is out of alignment, the shutter effect may be started, and the time saving rush effect B may be started during the symbol determination period after the end of the shutter effect.

Further, when the variable display (variation in reaching the relief time reduction) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 is a big hit, the following (1) to (3) may be used.

(1) When the jackpot fluctuation pattern "SP reach B (battle SP)" is determined in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a shutter effect is performed at the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 11-23 (B)), for example, the shutter effect ends at the timing of development to SP reach effect B (see the timing of FIG. 13-11 (A2)), and then SP reach effect B is executed and a big hit. May be notified.

(2) If the jackpot fluctuation pattern "SP reach B (battle SP)" is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the special number display remains "1" and the shutter effect is not performed. You may execute a certain effect such that the SP reach effect B is executed.

(3) When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a dedicated jackpot variation pattern (for example, shutter close → shutter open with decorative symbols aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

Further, the execution of the look-ahead effect described later when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the specified number of times remains, and the execution of the look-ahead effect in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 are restricted. Is preferable.

(Example of waiting screen for customers)
In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command for designating the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo effect in which the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. .. 11-28 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in a customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, characters of "demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, "play" on a triangular object. An image with the characters "Time installed" is displayed) and is included. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 has a special number display 069SG203 (book) in addition to the various images (friend characters, characters of "demo video", etc.) described above. In the example, a special number display in a white aspect) is further included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player during the customer waiting state that the number of remaining variable display times until the rescue time reduction is reached (in this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less). It can be done and the operation can be promoted.

(Modified example of customer waiting screen)
In the example of FIG. 11-28 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the special number display 069SG203, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. Regardless of the value of the relief time reduction counter, the demo image 069SG700 does not include the special number display 069SG203 in both cases where the relief time reduction counter value is 301 or more and 300 or less. May be good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), when the customer waiting demo effect is executed, the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, characters of "demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the characters "play time mounted" are displayed on a triangular object. ) And is included, but the special count display is not included regardless of the value of the relief time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 (C), at the timing when a new start prize is generated and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, and the screen right of the image display device 5 is displayed. The special number display 069SG203 is displayed at the bottom.

According to such a configuration, by not notifying the player of the remaining variable display number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached during the customer waiting state, only the gaming machines having a small remaining variable display number of time until the relief time reduction is reached are selected. This can be prevented and the occurrence of excessive bias in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Regardless of whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display number display or the special number display may be hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the power is turned on. ..

For example, when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of a predetermined number of times is performed regardless of whether the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is 301 or more and 300 or less. By hiding the variable display count display and the special count display until is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's game for the purpose of shortening the relief time only. In addition, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is displayed regardless of whether the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of power failure is 301 or more and 300 or less. By hiding the variable display count display and the special count display until the execution is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's avoidance of the game.

According to such a configuration, when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on at the time of opening the store, the player aiming at the relief time can refer to the final variable display number at the time of the power failure on the previous day. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the selection of a gaming machine having a small number of remaining variable display times until the relief time is reached and playing a game. In addition, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on at the time of opening the store, the player aiming at the relief time reduction can refer to the final variable display number at the time of the power failure on the previous day to reduce the relief time. It is also possible to suppress the avoidance of games on a gaming machine that has a large number of variable display times remaining until the goal is reached.

Not limited to the above mode, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes a specific value, the variable display count display or the variable display count display is performed even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is not executed after the power is turned on. The special number display may be displayed.

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is a specific value (for example, 20 or less) less than the value corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, 50). May display the special number of times display while waiting for customers after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. Further, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is not a specific value, but the variable display executed after the power is turned on indicates the number of relief times. Even if the value of the counter becomes a specific value (for example, 20 or less) and the value of the relief time reduction counter does not correspond to the predetermined number of times, the special number of times display may be displayed. good.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 1)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modification 1 will be described. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature unit 069SG modification 1. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect operation example relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature unit 069SG modified example 1.

First, an example of an effect operation relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, a variable display of a symbol can be displayed in a normal state (low accuracy / low base state). When a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without starting a new variable display after the stop, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command. A demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the device 5 to execute a customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when a start winning prize is generated, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of an effect operation relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the relief time reduction will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B1), the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction is stopped. When the number of pending storage is 0, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, and the image display device 5 The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character of is faded in to the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started. Further, the control of the time saving state B is started at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) elapses without starting a new variable display from the time when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation is stopped, the effect control CPU 120 is used for the customer waiting demo. Even if the display designation command is received, the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without executing the customer waiting demo effect (FIGS. 11-29). (B3)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the first variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). At the timing, the shutter effect is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B5)).

Next, an example of an effect operation relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of right-handed notification will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-29 (C1), the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction is displayed. When the number of reserved storages is 1 or more (for example, 1) when stopped, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display. Then, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-handed notification image larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters of image 069SG401 and "right-handed" are faded in to the front side of the shutter image 069SG250, and right-handed notification is started. Further, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time saving state B is started, and the first reserved storage is digested and the first variable display is performed. The effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in a state of being displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first hold storage becomes 0, the state in which the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (FIGS. 11-29 (C3). )reference).

Then, a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without starting a new variable display from the time when the variable display of the symbol is stopped in the first variable display after the control of the time saving state B is started. At this time, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command, the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect. The state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the second variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). After the shutter effect is terminated and the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (FIG. 11-29 (C5)). reference).

As described above, in the feature unit 069SG modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demo effect during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B. Since the display of the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the right-handed notification image 069SG400, does not disappear by limiting and executing the right-handed notification with priority, FIG. 11- As shown in 29 (A2), by displaying the demo image 069SG700, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time saving state B is controlled.

Further, in this modification, the execution of the customer waiting demo effect is restricted during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B, and the right-handed notification is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 issues a customer waiting demo display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B. The execution of the customer waiting demo effect may be restricted by not transmitting.

Next, another modification example of the effect operation example relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen when the relief time is shortened will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction is stopped and the reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display. Based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are faded in to the front side of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and right-handed notification is started. do. Further, the control of the time saving state B is started at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) elapses without starting a new variable display after the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation is stopped and controlled to the time reduction state B, the effect control is performed. Based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command, the CPU 120 displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer waiting demo effect, and right-handed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The broadcast image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the first variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). At the timing, the shutter effect is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), the player touches the touch ring of the ball striking operation handle 30 while displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect. At the same time, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the customer waiting demo production is ended, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the first variable display is performed. The shutter effect may be started at the timing when is started.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed so that the customer waiting demo effect can be executed. In addition, right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed". In this way, regarding the control of displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect, the processing load is reduced by making it common to the normal state, while the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and " By displaying the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game.

Further, for example, the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, is displayed in duplicate on the front side of the demo image 069SG700, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is displayed in a state of higher visibility than the demo image 069SG700. You may try to do it.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 2)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modification 2 will be described. FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing the game control timer interrupt processing as the feature unit 069SG modification 2. FIG. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2. 11-34 is a flowchart showing the display process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 is turned on / off and the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right to the effect control board 12 in the special symbol stop processing. Although the embodiment of transmitting the hit LED turn-off notification command is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of turning on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED to the effect control board 12 are illustrated. The process of transmitting the lighting notification command and the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command may be executed outside the special symbol stop processing. In addition, an example is shown in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by the special symbol normal processing, and the relief time reduction determination flag is turned on when the relief time reduction is reached. Is executed by the special symbol stop processing to turn on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and send the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right-handed LED off notification command to the effect control board 12 without using the relief time reduction determination flag. You may do it.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 as a modification of the feature unit 069SG, the CPU 103 turns on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24) in the game control timer interrupt process. Display processing (step 069SGS24A) including transmission processing of right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED off notification command to the effect control board 12 is executed, and normal symbol process processing (step S26) is executed. The display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 may be executed according to the setting process performed later in the display process.

In the feature unit 069SG modification 2, in order to execute the above-mentioned display process (step 069SGS24A) and display control process (step 069SGS26A), the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33. do.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33, the CPU 103 first, when the jackpot flag is set, similarly to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14. , Step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS135 are executed. Then, after executing the processes of step 069SGS138 and step 069SGS139 without executing the lighting start of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 or the transmission of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the CPU 103 is in the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B described later. The memory is cleared (step 069SGS139a), the process of step 069SGS140 is executed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 identifies the states of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B at that time after executing the processes of step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS133, and these time saving flags A and time saving. The state of the flag B is updated and stored (step 069SGS160). Further, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the probability change flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is already 0. (Step 069SGS162).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state B is already in place (step 069SGS162; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No). ) Sets the value of the relief time reduction counter to -1 (step 069SGS163), and determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after the value is -1 is 0 (step 069SGS164).

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then ends the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 or the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command. After executing the process of step 069SGS152 without executing the transmission, the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then starts lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and a right-handed LED start notification command. Outputs the specific number of times arrival information indicating that the variable display number has reached 1100 times from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like without executing transmission of the variable display result without becoming a big hit. A specific number (for example, 4) is set in the specific number of arrival information output count counter indicating the number of times to be performed, and a specific number of arrival information output period timer indicating the output period of the specific number of arrival information is set and a step is taken. Proceed to 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In the information output process (step S23) at the time of the next interrupt, the CPU 103 sets the output of the specific number of arrival information output count counter over the period set in the specific number arrival information output period timer. You only have to execute it as many times as you have done.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 executes the on / off of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the transmission of the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right-handed LED off notification command in the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt. After setting the transition flag of, the process of step 069SGS175 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, in the display process, first, whether or not the transition flag is set, that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process in which the variable display result is lost at the time of the previous interrupt is executed. It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS181). When the migration flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated, and when the migration flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the migration flag is cleared and stored (step 069SGS182). The state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B is compared with the state of the current time saving flag A and the time saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is changed to the on state (set state). It is determined whether or not it is done (step 069SGS184).

When the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is changed to the on state, that is, when the time saving state A or the time saving state B is newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 Along with setting the lighting, a right-handed LED lighting notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the display process (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has further changed to the off state (cleared state). Is determined (step 069SGS187). When the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and when the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, a new time saving flag B has been changed. When the time saving state A or the time saving state B is controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are turned off, and the right-handed LED off notification command is given to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted to end the display process (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting of step 069SGS185 or the extinguishing setting of the process of step 069SGS188.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the right-handed LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103. In response to receiving the right-handed LED turn-off notification command from the CPU 103, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 may be terminated.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the special number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, so that the remaining variable display number until the relief time reduction is reached can be obtained. It was a production configuration that suggested that the number was reduced, but it is not limited to such a form, it is a production different from the special number display, and the remaining variable display number until reaching the relief time reduction is small. You may perform the suggestion relief time saving suggestion effect.

First, the effect configurations in FIGS. 11-35 (A) and (B) are the same as the effect configurations relating to the variable display number display and the special number display (white mode) shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) and (B). Therefore, the description is omitted. Further, the effect configuration other than the relief time reduction suggestion effect in FIGS. 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the effect configuration related to the special number display (red mode) shown in FIG. 11-21 (C). The explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (C), when the first step in the relief time reduction suggestion effect is executed when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 11 to 30, the first suggestion image (in this example, in this example). The first suggestion image 069SG800A) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the relief time reduction that covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image is superimposed and displayed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image having a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the first suggestion image is superimposed and displayed seems to be deteriorated. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (D), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 10, when the second step in the relief time reduction suggestion effect is executed, the second suggestion image (this example). Then, the second suggestion image 069SG800B) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the relief time reduction that covers the upper half area of the background image is superimposed and displayed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image is an image having a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the second suggestion image is superimposed and displayed seems to be deteriorated. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In the present embodiment, the background image including the suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) by the relief time saving suggestion effect is used as the background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is displayed. In this way, the relief time is shortened by changing the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the relief time reduction counter regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to suggest that the number of variable display times remaining until the arrival is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In this example, as an image that changes the interface image, a suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the relief time is reached is superimposed and displayed on the background image. Not limited to such a form, an image not related to the shutter image at the time of reaching the relief time may be superimposed and displayed on the background image. For example, effect images having different display areas and display colors may be superimposed and displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter, and when the relief time reduction counter value is 21 or more, the effect image display area is the first. When the area (for example, 25% of the screen) and the display color is blue, but the value of the relief time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image is wider than the first area in the second area (for example, the screen). 50%), and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various productions)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-36 to 11-50. 11-36 are diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects. FIG. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a countdown notice. 11-38 is also a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the pending change notice. FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a symbol chance eye notice. FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the effect display notice. 11-42 is a diagram showing a look-ahead notice type determination table in FIGS. 11-42. 11-43 are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-43. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. 11-46 are diagrams showing a reach advance notice execution determination table, and FIGS. 11-46 are diagrams showing a button advance notice effect pattern determination table. 11-47 are diagrams showing the character notice pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-47. 11-48 is a diagram showing a movable body operation pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-48. 11-49 are diagrams showing the movable body notice pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-49. 11-50 are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each of the gaming states (A) to (C).

As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the effect control CPU 120 has a countdown notice and a hold change notice as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. And, it is possible to execute the design chance eye notice and the effect display notice.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a movable body advance notice, a character advance notice, a reach advance notice, and a button advance notice as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display is controlled to a big hit.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a hit / fail button effect and a movable body effect as a decision effect for notifying whether or not the variable display based on the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (SP reach A to E) is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. And can be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is scheduled to be given in the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is executed. Post-production can be executed in the post-production part that notifies the number of balls so that it can be specified.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the control of each gaming state by displaying the state start display when the control of any of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B as a special state is started. It is possible to execute a rush effect to notify.

(Pre-reading notice production)
Next, the look-ahead notice effect will be described. In the present embodiment, in the start winning determination process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the start winning, stores the hold information in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updates the hold storage number. .. When a start prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information, and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are displayed based on the extracted random number value. The look-ahead determination process is executed. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 enters the jackpot game state for the hold storage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 based on the information received from the main board 11 in the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. Whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect that suggests that it is controlled, and if it is decided to execute, the look-ahead notice effect type to be executed (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice" , Which of the "effect display notice" and the effect pattern of various notices) is decided.

In this embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined on the condition that the number of reserved storages is "4", but even when the number of reserved storages is other than "4". It may be decidable. Further, although the type of the look-ahead notice effect to be executed is determined to be one of countdown notice, hold change notice, symbol chance eye notice, and effect display notice, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, multiple notices may be executed at the same time.

The "countdown notice" starts the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display of the hold memory (hereinafter, also referred to as the target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. It is an effect of executing a countdown such as "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" for each.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the countdown notice is one of a pattern in which the countdown ends with "3", a pattern in which the countdown ends with "2", a pattern in which the countdown ends with "1", and a pattern in which the countdown ends with "0". The pattern is determined. The degree of expectation increases in the order of the pattern ending with "3", the pattern ending with "2", the pattern ending with "1", and the pattern ending with "0" (expectation: ending with "3" <" End with "2" <End with "1" <End with "0").

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A), when the execution of the countdown notice and the pattern ending at "0" are determined with the occurrence of the start winning prize, after the variable display is completed (FIG. 11). -37 (B)), when the next variable display is started, the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37 (C)), and the variable is displayed. The display ends (see FIG. 11-37 (D)). Then, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed (see FIGS. 11-37 (E)), and the variable is displayed. The display ends (see FIG. 11-37 (F)).

Next, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed (see FIGS. 11-38 (G)). The variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38 (H)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started, the character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG414 indicating "0" are displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 11-38 (I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the pattern of "3" is determined, a countdown notice is given when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in FIGS. 11-37 (C). When the pattern is finished and the pattern of "2" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in FIGS. 11-37 (E). When the pattern of "1" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in FIGS. 11-38 (G).

Further, the countdown effect pattern is arbitrary, and five or more types of effect patterns may be set. Further, the countdown may be started from a number other than "3". Further, the count may be increased as "0"-> "1"-> "2"-> "3".

The "hold change notice" changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold until it is notified whether or not it becomes a big hit in the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a production.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the hold change notice is a pattern in which the display color of the hold display is finally "blue", a pattern in which it becomes "green", a pattern in which it becomes "red", and a pattern in which it becomes "gold". And one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, at which timing the display color of the hold display is changed (for example, at the time of starting winning, at the time of holding memory digestion, variable display period of target holding, etc.). , When "red" is decided, it is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change it to "red" from the beginning, or to change it step by step like "blue" → "green" → "red"). .. Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectations: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (A), when the execution of the hold change notice and the "red" pattern are determined due to the occurrence of the start prize, the hold of the target hold that is the target of the hold change notice is held. After the display is displayed in white, the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39 (B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39 (C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started.

The number of effect patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more types of patterns. Further, the pending change may be changed not only to the one whose color changes as described above, but also to a character, an item, or the like.

The "design chance eye notice" is an odd number in the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect was started. This is an effect that is stopped and displayed by "combination of even-numbered symbols" or "combination of odd-numbered symbols".

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice is a pattern in which the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264") and a pattern in which the missing symbol is an "odd symbol combination" (a combination of odd symbols). For example, there is a pattern that is stopped and displayed at (such as "135"), and based on the variable display result, it is determined whether the outlier symbol is "a combination of even-numbered symbols" or "a combination of odd-numbered symbols". Further, the symbol combination of "combination of even-numbered symbols" and "combination of odd-numbered symbols" may be determined from a plurality of types. Further, there are a pattern in which the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052, which will be described later, which constitutes the decorative pattern is "blue", a pattern of "green", a pattern of "red", and a pattern of "gold", and any one of them. The pattern is determined. The degree of expectation is higher for "combination of odd-numbered symbols" than for "combination of even-numbered symbols" for out-of-order symbols. In addition, the pedestal display unit increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), when the execution of the symbol chance eye notice and the effect pattern are determined due to the occurrence of the start prize, the variable display ends and the symbol is displayed from the next variable display. Start the chance eye notice.

When the out-of-order symbol is determined to be an "even-numbered symbol combination" and the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is determined to have a "blue" pattern, the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed with an even-numbered symbol combination of "246" and the pedestal is displayed. Part 069SG052 is displayed in "blue" (see FIGS. 11-40 (B1) (B2)). On the other hand, when the pattern in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is "red" is determined when the out-of-order symbol is "combination of odd-numbered symbols", the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of odd-numbered symbols in "375" and the pedestal display unit is displayed. 069SG052 is displayed in "red" (see FIGS. 11-40 (C1) (C2)).

In the present embodiment, the decorative design is a pedestal display unit displayed on a number display unit 069SG051 composed of numbers "1" to "9" and a display layer (rear side) lower than the number display unit 069SG051. It is composed of 069SG052 and. The pedestal display unit 069SG052 is formed in a substantially square shape so as to surround the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the number display unit 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white). It is a display mode common to all numbers ("1" to "9").

It should be noted that the number of effect patterns for the symbol chance eye notice is arbitrary, and the number of combinations of symbols, the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052, and the like may have five or more types of patterns. A character image, a decorative image, or the like may be displayed on the pedestal display unit 069SG052. Further, for example, individual character images corresponding to each of the numbers (“1” to “9”) may be displayed.

"Effect display notice" is when the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect starts until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect starts. This is an effect in which the effect image is displayed in the lower region of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the effect display notice includes a pattern in which the effect image is "blue", a pattern in which the effect image is "green", a pattern in which the effect image is "red", and a pattern in which the effect image is "golden". The pattern is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, the mode of changing the display color of the effect image (for example, when "red" is determined, it is changed to "red" from the beginning, or "blue" → " It is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change in stages such as "green" → "red"). Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectations: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A), when the effect display notice is executed and the "red" pattern is determined with the occurrence of the start winning prize, the variable display ends (FIG. 11-41 (FIG. 11-41). B)), after the next variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-41 (C)), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the lower region of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The “blue” effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIGS. 11-41 (D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIGS. 11-41 (E)), and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable body on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A “red” effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the lower region of 32 (see FIG. 11-41 (F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41 (G)).

The number of effect patterns for the effect display notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more types of effect patterns. Further, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be different depending on the degree of expectation. Further, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display but also at the start of the variable display or at a period other than that.

Next, in the look-ahead advance notice setting process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state with respect to the hold storage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 based on the information received from the main board 11. The look-ahead notice effect type determination tables A to D used for determining whether or not to execute the suggested look-ahead notice effect, the type of the look-ahead notice effect to be executed when the execution is decided, will be described. In FIGS. 11-42, (A) is a notice effect type determination table A used in a normal state, (B) is a notice effect type determination table B used in a probabilistic state, and (C) is a notice effect used in a time saving state A. The type determination tables C and (D) are the advance notice effect type determination tables D used in the time saving state B. In the following, random values from 0 to 99 are used as random values for determining various production types.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A), in the advance notice effect type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 pieces are "non-executed". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to the "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to the "pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice". 10 judgment values are assigned to, 15 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (B), in the advance notice effect type determination table B used when the game state is the probable change state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 pieces are "non-executed". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to the "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to the "pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice". 5 judgment values are assigned to, 15 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), in the advance notice effect type determination table C used when the game state is the time saving state A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 40 pieces are set to "non-execution". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "missing", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", and the "design chance eye" is assigned. Ten determination values are assigned to the "notice", and ten determination values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (D), in the advance notice effect type determination table D used when the game state is the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 70 pieces are set to "non-execution". Judgment values are assigned, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

As described above, in the look-ahead notice effect, when the variable display result is "off", the ratio of "non-execution" increases in the order of the normal state, the probable change state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. That is, it is most easily executed in the probabilistic state, and is not executed (most difficult to be executed) in the time saving state B. Further, the "countdown notice" is a notice that is not executed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and the "hold change notice" and the "effect display notice" are notices that are not executed in the time saving state B.

Here, the determination of the look-ahead notice effect type is compared in three game states (probability change state, time reduction state A, time reduction state B) in which the time reduction control is executed.

First, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect is 80% in the probabilistic state, 60% in the time saving state A, and 30% in the time saving state B, and the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined is 40% in the probabilistic state, 30% in the time saving state A, and 0% (non-execution) in the time saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types (non-types) in the time saving state B". Execution) ".

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "big hit", only the "design chance eye notice" can be executed, and no other look-ahead notice effect is executed. , If the variable display result is "off", the look-ahead notice effect is not executed. That is, in the time saving state B, the execution rate of the pre-reading advance notice effect is lower than in the probability change state and the time saving state A, and the number of effect types that can be determined is small.

Further, in the time saving state B, the "design chance eye notice" can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect. This is because, in the time saving state B, a fluctuation pattern having a short variable display time (for example, ultra-shortened non-reach) is easily determined, and the time is shortened when the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable display of 1, for example. , It is easy to overlook the color change in a small hold display area such as "hold change notice". Further, although the "countdown notice" is executed in a plurality of variable displays, it is difficult to notice the change in the count because the period for displaying the count in one variable display is short. On the other hand, the "design chance eye notice" is executed by a plurality of variable displays, and the change in the display color between the decorative pattern and the pedestal can be appropriately shown when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It can be said that it is a look-ahead notice effect suitable for execution in.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed when the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect when the variable display result is "missing" is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect when the variable display result is "missing" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A, the time saving state B In the case where the variable display result is "off", the look-ahead notice effect may be executed. Further, if the number of types of pre-reading advance notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is smaller than that of the probabilistic state or the time-saving state A, it is possible to execute two or more types of pre-reading advance notice effects in the time-saving state B. May be done.

Next, the effect pattern determination tables A to F used by the effect control CPU 120 to determine the effect pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect determined to be executed will be described. In FIGS. 11-43, (A) is an effect pattern determination table A used in a normal state, (B) is an effect pattern determination table B used in a probabilistic state, and (C) is an effect pattern determination table used in a time saving state A. C and (D) are the effect pattern determination table D used in the time saving state B, (E) is the effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is the effect pattern determination table F used in the probabilistic state.

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (B), when the gaming state is in the probable change state, the effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (C), when the game state is the time saving state A, the effect pattern determination commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In Table C, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 70 are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment value is assigned.

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (D), in the effect pattern determination table D used when determining the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is "big hit". In the case of, 90 determination values are assigned to "red" and 10 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", the "design chance eye notice" is not executed, so that the determination value is not assigned to any of the effect patterns.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (E), in the effect pattern determination table E used when determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is "big hit". In the case of, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2", and the pattern ending with "1" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned, and 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "missing", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (F), in the effect pattern determination table F used when determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the probable change state, the variable display result is "big hit". In this case, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1". The determination value of is assigned, and 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "missing", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

In this way, the effect patterns in the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice are set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (in this order). Expectation: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold"). In addition, the effect pattern in the countdown notice is set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "3", "2", "1", and "0" (expectation: "3"). End with "<End with" 2 "<End with" 1 "<Up to" 0 ").

Here, the determination of the effect patterns of various notices is compared in three game states (probability change state, time reduction state A, time reduction state B) in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, the number of effect patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. The number of effect patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types (non-type) in the time saving state B". Execution) ".

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "big hit", it is possible to determine either "red" or "gold" as the effect pattern of the "design chance eye notice". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing", neither is determined as the effect pattern of "design chance eye notice" (non-execution). That is, in the time saving state B, the number of effect patterns that can be determined is smaller than in the probability variation state and the time saving state A.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the "movable body notice", the "character notice", the "reach notice", and the "button notice" as the notice effects are predetermined in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-44, the effect control CPU 120 is enabled to be executed at the time of Determine the pattern.

The "movable body notice" is an effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is controlled to a big hit by vibrating the movable body 32 up and down when the variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A1) (B1)). ). There are two types of effect patterns for the movable body notice: a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the vertical vibration width is small and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the vertical vibration width is larger than the vibration (small). Depending on the above, one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

The movable body 32 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and the effect position at the center of the display screen, and falls from the origin position to the effect position due to its own weight. It is possible. The vibration in the notice of the movable body is an effect of vibrating the movable body 32 up and down between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position. Further, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "character notice", a predetermined character appears in the period from the start of the variable display until the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the dialogue of the character is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the characters. It is an effect of inciting whether or not the reach mode is obtained by outputting the voice of the displayed dialogue (see FIGS. 11-57 (A2) and B2). The effect pattern of the reach notice is "line A pattern" where the character's line is "reach?" And "line B pattern" where the character's line is "reach !!", depending on the variable display result. , Non-execution, "line A pattern", "line B pattern" is determined. The content of the dialogue is arbitrary, and dialogue other than the above may be used.

The character dialogue pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Further, although the character type does not change, any character may be selectable from a plurality of types according to the variable display result.

The "reach notice" was stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L was stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. It is an effect that encourages whether or not the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, that is, whether or not it is in the reach mode (FIGS. 11-57 (A3 to A5), (Fig. 11-57). See B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol is displayed before the stop display position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R that is variably displayed. The deceleration display of the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the area 5L is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within the predetermined operation valid period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, if the reach mode is not reached, the left decoration is used. The decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 11-57 (A5) and (B5)), and the reach mode. In the case of, the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position.

The reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative symbols constituting the jackpot display result (for example, "333") from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol (identification information) to the derivation display of the display result. ), Except for one decorative symbol (for example, middle symbol), the decorative symbol (for example, left symbol and right symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the one decorative symbol (for example, middle symbol) is variablely displayed. It is a mode to perform (also called reach production).

When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice regardless of whether or not the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result in the reach notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278 described later. Whether or not it is decided by lottery, and an effect control pattern (process table) according to the decided content is set. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode is not set after the reach notice is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode is set after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach effect is executed. ..

When the above reach notice is executed, the "button notice" is performed after the deceleration display of the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is started. , It is an effect executed in the period until the predetermined operation valid period elapses (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative symbol until the predetermined operation valid period elapses, and imitates the operation promotion display and the push button 31B. The operation promotion display and the button image are started when the button image is displayed, and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed. And is hidden and ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice is a "long press pattern" that prompts a long press operation of the push button 31B over a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that causes the push button 31B to be repeatedly pressed for a predetermined operation period. There is a "continuous hit pattern" and a "blow pattern" that prompts a single push operation of the push button 31B. Depending on the variable display result, there are non-execution, "long press pattern", "continuous hit pattern", and "blow pattern". Either is decided. The effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation promotion display is "long press!" In the "long press pattern", "continuous hit!" In the "continuous hit pattern", and "blow!" In the "blow pattern".

(Decisive production)
Next, the decision production will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the determination effect is performed in the variable display of the super reach fluctuation pattern before notifying whether or not the jackpot is controlled at the end of the SP reach effect (FIG. 11-36). 58 (C4 to C8), FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to D3), (B7 to D3)), after the "win / fail button effect" and the "pass / fail button effect" executed during the predetermined operation valid period. There is a "movable body production" that is executed.

The "win / fail button effect" is an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the push button 31B until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, and is an operation promotion display consisting of the characters "Release !!" and "Press !!". And a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed. , The operation promotion display and the button image are hidden and the process ends (see FIGS. 11-58 (C4), 11-59 (A8 to A10), (B7)).

The effect pattern includes a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red, which will be described later. When "Pattern A-1", "Pattern A-2", "Pattern B-1", and "Pattern B-2" are determined in the "movable body motion pattern determination process", the "white pattern" is determined. When the "pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It should be noted that either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined according to the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body movement pattern determination process". Further, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect of notifying whether or not the movable body 32 is controlled to the big hit game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period in the "hit / fail button effect", or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, and the movable body 32 is at the origin position. When it falls to the effect position, it is notified that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and when the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the effect position, it is not controlled to the big hit game state, that is, it is out of place. Be notified (see FIGS. 11-58 (C6), 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32 and the game effect lamp 9 are turned on in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. , An effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 are not turned on, and the image that the enemy character is defeated and the effect image are not displayed.

In this way, in the "decision effect", when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit notification is performed by executing the movable body effect after the hit / fail button effect is performed, and the variable display result is out of order. In some cases, after the hit / fail button effect is performed, the missed notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

(Post-production)
Next, the post-production will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the post-effect is post-event after being notified that the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is executed is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the production part, the production is such that the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state is identifiable (see FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern to the notification of the variable display result, and the post-effect part is the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is the period from the end of the variable display part to the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-production part period. The post-production is executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, and during the symbol confirmation period after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. You may do so.

In the post-production, the ally character and the enemy character that appeared in the SP reach effect and the planned number of balls counter display that shows the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state are displayed, and the ally character attacks the enemy character. The scheduled number of balls counter display increases each time. Next, when an operation promotion display consisting of the characters "press!" And a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed during the predetermined operation valid period, and the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, Or, when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the ally character defeats the enemy character, a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500, etc.) is displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display, and the scheduled number during the big hit is displayed. The number of balls is notified. Then, after the end of the post-production, the jackpot game state is started.

(Rush production)
Next, the rush effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the rush effect includes the "rush introduction effect" executed before the start of the "probability change rush effect" and the "time saving rush effect A", and the control of the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state. The "probability change rush effect" that is executed when the game is started, and the "time saving rush effect A" that is executed when the control of the time saving state A is started after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state in the low probability state. There is a "time saving rush effect B" that is executed when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times without being controlled by. In addition, the timing for starting the relief time saving arrival variation (variable display when the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes 0) in which the "time saving rushing effect B" is executed, that is, before the execution of the "time saving rushing effect B" is ""Shuttereffect" (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) (C) and 11-25 (B) (C)) is executed.

Specifically, the "probability change rush effect" and the "time reduction rush effect A" are executed during the ending period of the big hit game state, and the "time reduction rush effect B" is the 900th time when the control start condition of the time reduction state B is satisfied. It is executed in the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the variable display (relief time reduction arrival variation) of is completed.

"Time saving rush effect A" is a time saving state A by displaying the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" after the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed. It is an effect of notifying that the control of the above is started (see FIG. 11-63 (D)).

In the "probability change rush effect", after the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is displayed, the character "pole" is displayed in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!". This is an effect of notifying that the control of the probabilistic state is started (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

In "Time saving rush effect B", the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is not displayed, and in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" It is an effect of notifying that the control of the time saving state B is started by displaying the characters (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

Further, for the probabilistic rush effect / time saving rush effect B, the characters “BATTLE RUSH rush !!” may be displayed after displaying the characters “pole” and “play ・ 1100”.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 11-44 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 069SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "1-0" and stored. 1 The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", and the first special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the buffer number "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not in the on state (off state) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 069SGS271; No). Step 069SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes). The various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning is shifted to the upper position by one buffer number. (Step 069SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-0" and stored. 2 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", and the second special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to the reception of the variation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is deleted at the end of the variable display. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be erased according to the reading.

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do. In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command, and at the end of the variable display. It will be erased. The display result specification command may be erased according to the reading.

In this feature unit 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a stop symbol other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of even-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "" are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which the three symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are irregular is determined as the stop symbol.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the above-mentioned symbol chance eye advance in the look-ahead advance notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. 10, the variable display until the variable display of the target hold is started. The stop symbol of is determined to be either an even symbol combination or an odd symbol combination.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 stores the relief time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the relief time reduction has been reached in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the variation is the relief time reduction arrival variation. (Step 069SGS276A). If it is a relief time reduction arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), the shutter effect setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a relief time reduction arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter effect setting process, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the shutter effect, and the corresponding shutter effect is started at the timing when the timer for waiting for the start of the effect is timered up.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS283. If the variation pattern is not a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach advance notice execution determination process is executed. (Step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution decision process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for the reach notice execution decision are extracted, and whether or not the reach notice is executed is determined using the reach notice execution decision table shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A). do.

In the reach advance notice execution decision table, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A), when the game state is the "normal state" and the game state is the "probability change state" for each of "non-execution" and "execution". , In the case of "time saving state A" and in the case of "time saving state B", different determination values are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is the "normal state", 50 determination values are assigned to the "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to the "execution". Further, when the gaming state is the "probability change state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the game state is the "time saving state A", 60 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the game state is the "time saving state B", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, the reach notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in the time saving state B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice is not executed in the time saving state B. You may do so.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not the execution of the reach notice is decided in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A), and when it is determined that the execution of the reach notice is not decided (step 069SGS279A; No), if it is determined that the execution of the reach notice is decided by proceeding to step 069SGS280 (step 069SGS279A; Yes), after selecting the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice (step 069SGS279B), the button notice is given. The pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button advance notice pattern determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the button advance notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E), the button advance notice pattern corresponding to the gaming state is determined. The button notice pattern is determined using the tables A to D.

In the button notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E), for each pattern of "non-execution", "blow", "continuous hit", and "long press". When the variable display result is "big hit", "out of reach", and "out of reach", different judgment values are shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E). It is assigned to be a number.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B), in the button notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press". Twenty determination values are assigned to. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. On the other hand, 10 judgment values are assigned, and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". 10 determination values are assigned to, and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (C), in the button notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the "probability change state", when the variable display result is "big hit", "non-execution" is performed. 20 judgment values are assigned to "", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. On the other hand, 10 judgment values are assigned, and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". 10 determination values are assigned to, and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), in the button notice pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “non-big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. 20 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. On the other hand, five judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". Five determination values are assigned to, and ten determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (E), in the button notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the “time saving state B”, the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is “non”. 90 judgment values are assigned to "execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "blow". Further, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 5 determination values are assigned to "blow". Further, when the variable display result when the number of reserved storages is "0" is "missing", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, the button notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the variable display result when the reserved storage number is "0" is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but the execution rate of the reach notice is low and the execution rate is low. , Even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice is not executed.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0" in the time saving state B, the button notice is not executed even if the reach notice is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A is lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the variable display result is "missing". Button notice may be executable.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the button notice is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach notice. Not limited to this, regardless of the number of reserved storages, if the variable display result is "off", the button notice may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a big hit or a missed reach, a pattern of "blow" that prompts the player to perform one operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and the player is operated for a predetermined operation validity period. The "continuous hit" or "long press" operation that prompts the player, that is, the "continuous hit" or "long press" operation that is more troublesome than the "blow" operation that prompts the player to perform one operation is not promoted.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, when it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of the reach notice has not been determined (step 069SGS279A; No), or after the button notice pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS279C, the effect control CPU 120 determines. The character notice pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS280). In the character notice pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the character notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D), the character notice pattern determination table A corresponding to the gaming state is used. -D is used to determine the character notice pattern.

In the character notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D), "non-execution", "line A (reach?)", And "line B (maybe reach !!)". When the variable display result is "big hit" and "missing" for each pattern of "", the different judgment values are the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D). So assigned.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A), in the character notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". Twenty determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (B), in the character notice pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability change state", when the variable display result is "big hit", "non-execution" is performed. 20 determination values are assigned to "," 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (C), in the character notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “non-big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Twenty determination values are assigned to "execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (D), in the character notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the “time saving state B”, the variable display result is “non-big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. 90 determination values are assigned to "execution", and 10 determination values are assigned to "line B". Further, when the variable display result is "off", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 5 determination values are assigned to "line A". Further, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, the character notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, if the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0", the non-reach or SP reach fluctuation pattern is determined, but in any fluctuation pattern variable display. The character notice is never executed.

In the present embodiment, the character advancement is not executed when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the time saving state B, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if the character notice can be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the character notice when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. good.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the embodiment in which the character notice is executed at a rate of 5% is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is "missing" regardless of the number of reserved storages, the character notice may not be executed.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, after executing the character notice pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach variation pattern. Judgment (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS282. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), the movable body movement pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), the movable body motion pattern corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. The movable body movement pattern is determined using the determination tables A to D.

In the movable body operation pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), the movable body notice is not executed, and the movable body 32 is dropped by the movable body effect (decision effect). "Pattern A-1" for big hit, "Pattern A-2" for big hit that drops the movable body 32 by the movable body production, the movable body notice is vibration (large), "Pattern A-3" for big hits that drop the movable body 32 in the movable body production, "Pattern B-1" for the detachment that does not drop the movable body 32 in the movable body production of the fixed production without executing the movable body notice , The movable body notice is vibration (small), and the movable body 32 is not dropped by the movable body effect "Pattern B-2". For each pattern of "Pattern B-3" for not letting go, when the variable display result is "big hit" and "missing", different judgment values are obtained from FIGS. 11-48 (A) to ( It is assigned so as to have the number of determination values shown in D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), in the movable body movement pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". , 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". A value has been assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-1" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), in the movable body movement pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the "probability changing state", when the variable display result is "big hit", the "pattern" is used. 20 judgment values are assigned to "A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Has been done. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-1" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (C), in the movable body movement pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “big hit” in the case of “big hit”. 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), in the movable body movement pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is the “time saving state B”, the variable display result is “big hit” in the case of “big hit”. 90 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. Further, when the variable display result is "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1".

In this way, when comparing the movable body movement pattern when the variable display result is a big hit in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, both the movable body notice and the movable body effect are executed "Pattern A-". The execution ratios of "2" and "Pattern A-3" are higher in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A than in the time saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of the "pattern A-1" in which the movable body notice is not executed and only the movable body effect is executed is higher in the time saving state B than in the probable change state and the time saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body movement patterns when the variable display result is out of alignment in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, only the movable body notice is executed "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3". The execution rate of "" is higher in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A than in the time saving state B (non-execution).

That is, in the case of the time saving state B, the execution rate of the movable body notice is lower than that of the probable change state and the time saving state A (execution rate of the movable body notice: probabilistic change state> time saving state A> time saving state B).

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the execution of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable body advance notice is not executed and only the movable body effect is executed. Although the form in which the ratio is 90% is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and "Pattern A-1" in the case where the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. If it is higher than the execution rate of, it may be 90% or less. Further, the execution rate may be 100% when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, when it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the movable body notice pattern. The process is executed (step 069SGS282). In the movable body notice pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the movable body notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D), the movable body notice pattern corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. The movable body notice pattern is determined using the determination tables A to D.

In the movable body notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D), each pattern of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)" is shown. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", different judgment values are assigned to each of the cases of "missing" so as to be the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D). ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), in the movable body notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". , 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". Assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration". (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), in the movable body notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the “probability changing state”, the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is “non”. 10 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". There is. When the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration". (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), in the movable body notice pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “big hit” in the case of “big hit”. 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". ing. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration". (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the “time saving state B”, when the variable display result is the “big hit”, the supermarket is used. Since only the reach fluctuation pattern is determined, no judgment value is assigned to "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)". If the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution". There is.

In this way, the movable body notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B when compared in the three gaming states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probable change). State> Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, the movable body advance notice is not executed even when the reserved storage number is “0”.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body advance notice is not executed. It is not limited, and the movable body notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable body notice when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. It may be possible.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the movable body notice is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is other than "0", the movable body notice may be executed.

When the execution of any of the effect patterns is determined in the button advance notice pattern determination process, the character advance notice pattern determination process, and the movable body advance notice pattern determination process described above, the period until the advance notice is started is set in the various advance notice start waiting timers. , Various notices Waiting for start The corresponding notice is started when the timer is up.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, when the fluctuation pattern is shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or ultra-shortened non-reach in step 069SGS277, when the movable body operation pattern determination process of step 069SGS281B is executed, the movable body notice pattern determination in step 069SGS282 is executed. When the process is executed, in step 069SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 069SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 069SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process is terminated.

(Variable display effect processing)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by -1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, various effect start waiting timers are set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect, etc.), or the advance notice effect execution flag is on (execution of the advance notice effect). In the case of (step 069SGS304; Y), various effect processing is executed (step 069SGS305). If both the effect start waiting timer and the advance notice effect execution flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without executing the effect process of step 069SGS305.

In step 069SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 069SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 069SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 069SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbol). Image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 069SGS310; N), after the execution of step 069SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 069SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is not out of the timer (step 069SGS313; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS314; No), the process is terminated.

When the variable display time timer is out of the timer in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or when the confirmation command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), the right-handed LED lighting start command is received. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step 069SGS315). When the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-handed LED069SG031 is started to light, and the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start the right-handed notification. After that (step 069SGS316), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated.

If the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether or not the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS317). When the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the on state (step 069SGS317; Yes), after the right-handed LED069SG031 is finished lighting and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is hidden and the right-handed notification is finished (step 069SGS317; Yes). Step 069SGS318), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. If the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 069SGS319). , Ends the process.

Although not shown in detail, after the processes from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 have been executed, the effect control process flag has elapsed after the symbol confirmation period specified from the symbol confirmation designation command based on the confirmation command reception flag has elapsed. The value of is updated to the value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step S173).

In addition, even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern showing a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Even when a specified command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 069SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

(Various operation examples by game state)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time saving state A will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-50. 11-50 is a diagram showing an example of a variable operation for each game state, (B) a diagram showing an example of an effect operation for each game state, and (C) for explaining the characteristics of the time saving state B. It is a figure.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (A), the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state", and "time saving state A" are compared. ..

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. There are "two" of "reach" and "SP reach D", and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the maximum number of reserved memories is "1 to 3". There are "4 pieces" of "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". As described above, when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, the maximum number is "3" of "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

That is, when the variable display result is "out of time", the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns (for example, two) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" is the variable display pattern that can be determined in "time saving state A". It is less than the number (eg, 3) and less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 4) that can be determined in the "probability change state".

The number of out-of-bounds fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probable change state, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If the number is small, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time reduction state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0. The average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for is about 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and is determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for possible deviation is about 2.205 seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that the time saving state B is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 1100 variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.25 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is about 8.2 seconds. {((7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, variable display time of variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storage is 1 to 3 The average time of is about 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the probabilistic change state is started and the hold storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the hold storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 variable displays, it is for the deviation that can be determined in the probabilistic state. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is about 9.15. Seconds {((7s × 95) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about. 5.55 seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the time saving state A is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 times variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time reduction state B" when the variable display result is "off" is in the "time reduction state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (for example, about 5.58 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 4.83 seconds). Less than seconds).

Further, the average time (for example, about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B" is the holding storage in the "time saving state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined when the number is 0 (for example, about 9.15 seconds), and the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state". Less than the average time of variable display time (eg, about 8.2 seconds).

Further, the average time (for example, about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time for the deviation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 in the "time saving state B" is set in the "time saving state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (for example, about 5.55 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 4.8 seconds). Less than seconds).

According to the items (A1) and (A2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. The variable display in which is not determined provides a suitable time-saving state B because the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state A because there are few types of fluctuation patterns and the average time of the variable display time is shortened. can do.

The average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern becomes longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If it is shortened, the above time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, "1 piece" of "SP reach D". In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the maximum is "not via SP", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". In "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the maximum is "not via SP" and "SP reach E". "Two".

That is, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (for example, one) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "big hit" is the variable display pattern that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (eg, 2) and less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 3) that can be determined in the "probability change state".

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probable change state, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If the number is small, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time reduction state B", as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the jackpot can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 40 seconds.

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is about 51.1 seconds { ((22s × 5) ＋ (55s × 80) ＋ (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1} Therefore, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot that can be determined in the probabilistic state is about. It will be 51.1 seconds.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable display time for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is about 62.8 seconds. {((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” when the variable display result is the “big hit” is determined in the “time saving state A”. It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). Less than.

According to the items (A3) and (A4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display in which is determined, the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A because the number of types of fluctuation patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened. Can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern becomes longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If it is shortened, the above time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), 95% when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3. In the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3, it is 80%, and in the "time saving state A", FIG. 11 As shown in -7 (A) and (B), when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3, it is 70%.

That is, the ratio (for example, 97%) in which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is the variable display result in the "time saving state A". Is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "off" (for example, 95%), and when the variable display result is "off" in the "probability change state", the CPU 103 Is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern" is determined (eg, 95%).

According to the item (A5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is not determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 is 97% in the time saving state B, and in both the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. Although the embodiment in which the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A decrease in this order at 95% is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B (for example, 97%) and the probable change state (for example). , 95%), in the order of time saving state A (for example, 94%), or if the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state, the above The ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B", the ratio of the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" determined by the CPU 103 is 97%. The present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is 100%, that is, ". When the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B", the reach fluctuation pattern may not be determined.

Further, when the variable display result is "out of time", the CPU 103 determines the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (for example, "non-reach A") that can be determined in "time saving state B", and in "time saving state A" and "probability change state". By sharing with a possible out-of-reach variation pattern (eg, "non-reach A"), it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the deviation variation pattern (for example, "SP reach D") that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" and the deviation variation pattern that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, "SP reach D"). For example, by sharing with "SP reach D"), it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (B), the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state" and "time saving state A" are compared. do.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution ratios of "movable body notice" and "character notice" as jackpot suggestion effects in the variable display of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0, in "time saving state B", FIG. 11-49 ( As shown in D), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" is 0% (non-execution), and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), the execution rate of the "character notice" is 0% (non-execution). Yes, in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" is 40%, and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (B), the execution of the "character notice". The ratio is 30%, and in the "time saving state A", the execution ratio of the "movable body notice" is 30% as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C). The execution rate of the "character notice" is 20%.

That is, the loss determined when the variable display is executed in the loss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state A", and when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state". When the variable display is executed in the variable pattern, the suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while the reserved storage number is 0 in the "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined in, the suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is not executed in the variable display.

According to the item (B1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it can be determined when the reserved storage number is 0 in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit game state continues for a long time. In the variable display of various fluctuation patterns (for example, "non-reach" and "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach), a suitable time saving state B is provided because it is not unnecessarily fanned by a movable body notice or a character notice. be able to.

More specifically, when the control of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B is started, the holding memory is stored in the first holding memory because the left-handed game was performed in the normal state until then. However, it is conceivable that there is no hold memory in the second hold memory. That is, when the probability change state or the time saving state A is started at the first hit, or when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times, the time for storing the holding storage in the second holding storage is set. The out-of-reach pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in order to earn is an out-of-reach pattern with a longer variable display time than a shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds or a variation time of 25 seconds. And 40 seconds SP reach, etc.) are determined at a high rate. Then, when the deviation variation pattern whose variable display time is longer than the shortened non-reach is determined, suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is highly possible that the player has executed various missed notices in the long game period so far, so that even in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" is further performed. Or, if the "character notice" is executed, it causes annoyance. Therefore, when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state B, it is "movable". "Body notice" and "character notice" are not executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B", the "movable body notice" or "movable body notice" or "moveable body notice" or "moveable body notice" is executed in the variable display. An example of a mode in which a suggestion effect such as "character notice" is not executed is illustrated. The execution rate of the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in the variable display is higher than the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in the "probability change state" and "time saving state A". It is preferable that the execution rate is lower than the execution rate.

Further, the ratio of suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is the time saving state B. If the execution rate of the "movable body notice" or "character notice" in is lower than the execution rate of the "movable body notice" or "character notice" in at least one of the time saving state A and the probable change state, the above ratios vary. Can be changed to.

Further, in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are not executed in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are executed in the case of the jackpot fluctuation pattern. You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed in the time saving state B.

In addition, the suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state is a "reach notice" or "reach notice" as a fan effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode (whether or not the reach is established). It may include "button notice". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the "reach notice" or the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B.

Further, based on the variable display result, the first suggestion effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and the second suggestion effect are controlled to a higher hit game state than when the first suggestion effect is executed. By being able to execute multiple types of suggestion effects including suggestion effects (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), it is interesting to pay attention to whether or not the suggestion effects are executed in the time saving state B. Can be enhanced.

<Item B2>
As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is off is not determined in "time saving state B", so "0". In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" are "4". Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), there are "three" of "holding change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice".

That is, the number of types of pre-reading notice (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is that the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of types (for example, 3), and the pre-reading that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state". It is less than the number of types of notice (for example, 4).

In the present embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is 0, but the present invention exemplifies the embodiment. The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is not limited to this, for example, the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If the variable display result is out of alignment in at least one of the above, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to execute one or more types of pre-reading notices as long as it is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined.

Further, the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time reduction state B" is variable display in at least one of the "time reduction state A" and the "probability change state". If the result is less than the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the result is out of order, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of the "look-ahead notice" when the variable display result is off, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the execution rate of the "look-ahead notice" is "0%" because neither is executed, and the "probability change". In the "state", as shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), the total execution ratio of "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%". In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), the total execution ratio of "holding change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice (for example, 0%) when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of place in the "time saving state A". It is lower than (for example, 30%) and lower than the execution rate (for example, 40%) of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state".

According to the items (B2) and (B3), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display in which is not determined, the development cost can be suppressed by reducing the number of types of the look-ahead notice effect that can be determined, and since it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B. can.

In the present embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice is 0% when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B", that is, the mode in which the pre-reading notice is not executed is illustrated. The variable display result is not limited, and for example, when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B", the execution rate of the look-ahead notice is the variable display result in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice in the case where is off, the look-ahead notice may be executed.

Further, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is the look-ahead when the variable display result is out of alignment in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability change state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the notice, the above rate can be changed in various ways.

Further, as a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability change state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye notice" , "Blue" pattern of "effect display notice") and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold") in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, FIG. 11). -43 (D)) is lower than the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)). In the state B, since it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the first look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, as a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time-reduced state A, the time-reduced state B, and the probability change state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice". , "Blue" pattern of "effect display notice") and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold") in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, FIG. 11). -43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)). Since the second look-ahead notice effect is likely to be executed in the time saving state B, a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

Further, the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A and the probability change state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time reduction state B are common (for example, "design chance eye". By "notice"), the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state are common. (For example, "design chance eye notice") By not setting a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the look-ahead notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state A are common (for example). By ("design chance eye notice"), the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of the "button notice" as an action promotion effect that encourages the player's action, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the case of a big hit, it is "10%", which is out of the question. In the case of "5%", in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "30%" in the case of a missed reach, and "time reduction". In "state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a miss. It should be noted that these execution ratios are the ratios when the "reach notice" is executed.

That is, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit and 5% for the loss) is the execution of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A". It is lower than the ratio (for example, 80% for big hit and 20% for miss) and more than the execution ratio of button notice per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 80% for big hit and 30% for miss). Low.

According to the item (B4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the push button is pushed to the player in the variable display of 1 in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the button notice, which is an operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of 31B, is executed is small, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is higher than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" or the "probability change state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button notice may not be executed in the “time saving state B” (execution ratio 0%).

Further, if the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" or the "probability change state", the above ratio. Can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button notice, a "blow pattern" as a first motion promotion effect that encourages the player to perform one action, and a "continuous hit pattern, long" as a second motion promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a predetermined motion period. Regarding the execution rate with the "push pattern", in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "10%" in the case of a big hit, and in the case of out of reach. Is "5%", in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is a big hit, and in the case of miss, it is "0% (non-execution)".

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit, "10%" in the case of a miss, and "10%" on average. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a miss.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "7.5%" in the case of a miss. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "17.5%" in the case of a miss.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of both the "blow pattern" and the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A", and in the "time saving state B". , While it is possible to determine the "blow pattern", it does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for big hit and miss) is "continuous hit pattern" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". The execution rate of "pattern, long press pattern" is lower than the execution rate (for example, 40% for big hit, 20% for miss), and the execution rate of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". It is lower than (for example, 40% for big hits and 17.5% for misses).

According to the item (B5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the player pushes over the operation valid period in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Since it is less likely to prompt the player to perform troublesome operations such as "continuous hitting pattern, long press pattern" in which the button 31B must be continuously operated, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the "blow pattern" can be determined in the "time saving state B", but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, the determination ratio of the "blow pattern" in the "time saving state B" is the "blow pattern" in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the decision rate of, the "blow pattern" may be made feasible.

Further, in the time saving state B, the rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 10%) is for effect control when the variable display result is out of order. By making the rate higher than the rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 (for example, 5%), it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the "button notice" in the time saving state B and improve the interest.

In addition, as the effect pattern of the "button notice", there are a "blow" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "blow" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 10%) is the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variation state (for example, 40%). ), But the rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in the time saving state B is higher than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variation. good. By doing so, when the movement promotion effect is executed in the time saving state B, it often becomes a "blow" pattern, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probability change state and the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the "reach notice" is executed. By (period), the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the "button notice" between the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated before the operation promotion preparation effect (for example, although not particularly shown, the operation valid period is started) before executing the “button notice”. When the effect to be performed or the effect display is displayed), the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state, and the operation promotion preparation effect in the time saving state B are performed. It is preferable that the execution period is the same as that of the execution period, and by doing so, the development cost can be reduced and it is possible to preferably notify that the "button notice" is executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of 1 of the "movable body notice" as a suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (D). In the case of big hit and miss, it is 0% (non-execution), and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of big hit and 40% in the case of miss, and " In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (C), 90% is the case of a big hit and 30% is the case of a miss.

That is, the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for the big hit and 0% for the loss) is the "movable body" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "notice" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 30%), and the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 40%). ) Is lower.

According to the item (B6), it is suggested that the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the movable body notice is executed is reduced, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is 0% is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In (), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is "movable" per 1 variable display in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the "body notice", the "movable body notice" may be executed in the "time saving state B".

Further, the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 0%) is "in the time saving state A or the probability change state when the variable display result is a big hit". Although it is lower than the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed (for example, 90%), the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is a big hit for the variable display result. In this case, the rate may be higher than the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probable change state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" different between the time saving state A, the probable change state, and the time saving state B.

Further, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 0%) is the time saving state A or the probability change state when the variable display result is a big hit. Although it is lower than the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed (for example, 30%), the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is , The rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit may be higher than the rate (for example, 30%). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" different between the time saving state A, the probable change state, and the time saving state B.

<Item B7>
As shown in FIGS. 11-47 (D) in the "time saving state B", the execution ratio per 1 variable display of the "character notice" as a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode. In the case of a big hit, it is 10%, in the case of a miss, it is 5%, and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-47 (B), in the case of a big hit, it is 80%, and in the case of a miss, it is 30%. Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (C), it is 80% in the case of a big hit and 20% in the case of a miss.

That is, the execution rate of the "character notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit and 5% for the loss) is the "character notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A". Is lower than the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 80% of big hit, 30% of loss). Low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A), the execution ratio per 1 variable display of the "reach notice" as a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode is "time saving state". It is 20% in "B", 50% in "probability change state", and 40% in "time saving state A".

That is, the execution rate (for example, 20%) of the "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is the execution rate of the "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" (for example). , 40%) and lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state".

According to the item (B7), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, whether or not the reach is established is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the reach notice and the button notice are executed is reduced, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the "character notice" per variable display in the "time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time saving state A" and the "movable body notice". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of the "character notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" may be 0%, that is, not executed. Further, if the execution ratio of the "character notice" per variable display in the "time reduction state B" is lower than the execution ratio of the "time reduction state A" or the "movable body notice", the above ratio can be changed in various ways. be.

<Item B8>
"Pattern A" that executes "movable body notice" and "movable body effect" as a movable body operation pattern of "movable body notice" and "movable body effect" that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display of 1. -2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern) "and" pattern A-1 (first effect execution pattern) "that executes only" movable body effect "without executing" movable body notice ". 2 Production execution pattern) ”, and the execution ratio of“ Pattern A-1 ”when the variable display result is a big hit is as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D) in“ Time saving state B ”. In the "probability change state", it is 20% as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), and in the "time saving state A", it is 10% as shown in FIG. 11-48 (C). ..

That is, the execution rate (for example, 90%) of the "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is "" when the variable display result is out of place in the "time saving state A". It is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 10%) and higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 20%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state". high.

According to the item (B8), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In this case, the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the notice of the movable body before the movable body effect in which the big hit is notified by the fall of the movable body 32 is executed. Can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the execution rate of the "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is such that the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state A" or the "probability change state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is out of alignment in the “time saving state B”. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" may be set to 0%, that is, it may not be executed.

Further, the rate at which "Pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state (for example). , 80-90%), "Pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. By being higher than the ratio (for example, 10%), it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the movable body 32 operates in the time saving state A or the probable change state.

Further, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state (for example, 80 to 90%). Therefore, since the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the time saving state B, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

<Item B9>
FIG. 11-60 describes the production mode of the “post-production” that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot gaming state that the CPU 120 for effect control notifies that the SP reach effect is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. As shown in, the "time saving state B", the "probability changing state", and the "time saving state A" are common.

According to the item (B9), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the digestion speed of the variable display is increased, and after being notified that the variable display is controlled to the jackpot game state, the time is shortened. Since it is possible to excite with a common effect between A and the probabilistic state, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, and the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. , Are common (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), so that the development cost can be reduced.

Further, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probable change state, and the control of the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. Since the control data to be used is common (for example, light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), the development cost can be reduced.

Further, a vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A and the probable change state, and a vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. , Are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), so that the development cost can be reduced.

<Item B10>
When the time saving control is started, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the start of the time saving control by displaying the rush image 069SG470 (for example, the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!") as the special state start display. Regarding the "rush effect" as the special state start effect, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the probability change rush effect when the control of the probability change state is started, and the time reduction rush effect B is displayed when the control of the time reduction state B is started. In addition to displaying the inrush image 069SG470, the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, the characters "Yu 1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. (See FIGS. 11-63 (D), FIGS. 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to the item (B10), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the probability change state is controlled in the rush effect in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit game state continues for a long time. Not only the inrush image 069SG470 common to the time when it is started, but also the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state is started, are displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B is excited. Can be done.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time in which the “rush effect” can be executed in the relief time reduction arrival variation. By doing so, the "rush effect" can be suitably executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (C), the difference between the "time saving state B" and the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A" will be described.

<Item C1>
As described in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIGS. 11-50 (A), the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 is the smallest in the time-saving state B, and the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns is the smallest. The average time of the variable display time of the pattern or the jackpot fluctuation pattern is the shortest in the time saving state B, and the determination rate of the non-reach loss is the highest in the time saving state B. Therefore, the average digestion time per variable display of 1 in each of the "time reduction state B", "probability change state", and "time reduction state A" in which the time reduction control is performed is the fastest in the time reduction state B, and the probability change state is medium speed. , The time saving state A is low speed.

In this way, of the time-saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time-saving state A, in which the fluctuation efficiency becomes higher than the normal state due to the time-saving control, the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A are the jackpot gaming states that are advantageous for the player. Whereas the time saving state B is controlled via the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big hit in the low probability state. be.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the variable display number of times the time saving control is executed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in the time saving state B, the variable display number of times the time saving control is executed is the first number of times (for example, 110 times). The second number of times (for example, 1100 times) is larger than the first number of times.

In other words, in the case of a time-saving state such as a probabilistic state or a time-saving state A, the player can wait while expecting the next big hit while enjoying the reach and various effects while suppressing the investment compared to the normal state. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state B, there is no big hit and the control is performed after a long period of game in a state disadvantageous to the player, and the variable display number of the time saving control is larger than that of the probability change state or the time saving state A. Considering that the time is shortened, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency as described above, the number of unnecessary hits is reduced and investment is suppressed, and rather than enjoying the production, the out-of-order variable display is efficiently digested for a short period of time. By giving priority to attracting a big hit in the meantime, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

<Item C2>
Further, as described in each item B1 to B10 shown in FIGS. 11-50 (B), the execution ratios of the various advance notice effects described above are the lowest in the time saving state B, the highest in the probability variation state, and the time saving state A. It is inside.

In other words, in the long-term game until it is controlled to the time saving state B, it is highly possible that the player is considerably depressed because various advance notice effects are executed and the player continues to be out of the game. In the state B, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is lower than that of the other game states, so that it is possible to suitably prevent the player's motivation to play due to the off-effect effect.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time saving state B has higher fluctuation efficiency than other probabilistic states and time saving states A in which the time saving control is performed in the same manner, and the chances of being fueled by the advance notice are reduced, so that additional investment is made. It is a gaming state characterized by appropriately digesting variable display and waiting for a big hit while suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing.

More specifically, in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed), the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, and the easy entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. While the control (high open control, high base control) is common to other probabilistic states and time saving states A, the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is changed to other probabilistic changing states and time saving states. It is a time-saving state in which the fluctuation efficiency is prioritized over the effectability by reducing the execution frequency of various effects while increasing the fluctuation efficiency by making it shorter than the state A.

Further, the deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the deviation variation display pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time reduction state A and the probabilistic state. , SP reach D), and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the deviation variation display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time reduction state A and the probable change state. By making it common to) and, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state is controlled by the time saving state A. It is preferable that the control period is shorter than the average time. By doing so, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than that in the probabilistic state, and the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided, and in the time saving state A, the time saving state A can be provided. By increasing the average time of the control period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of out-of-range fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 3), and in the time-saving state A. The number of deviable variation patterns that can be determined (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of deviable variation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 4). While reducing the number and giving priority to the digestion of variable display, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by increasing the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state.

Further, the jackpot variable display pattern (eg, the jackpot variable display pattern) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in at least one of the jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach D) that can be determined in the time saving state B and the time saving state A and the probability variation state (for example, the probability variation state). , SP reach D), and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, not via SP) are common. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state is controlled by the time saving state A. It is preferable that the control period is shorter than the average time. By doing so, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than that in the probabilistic state, and the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided, and in the time saving state A, the time saving state A can be provided. By increasing the average time of the control period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and in the time saving state A. The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 3). While reducing the number and giving priority to the digestion of variable display, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probable change state.

Further, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. By not setting the non-reach deviation that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the non-reach deviation that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, SP non-via). By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, not via SP) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B, and a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, not via SP) that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state B, an embodiment in which the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is lower than that in the probability variation state or the time saving state A is exemplified. / Low base state) When the remaining variable display number of times until controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) becomes less than a predetermined number of times (for example, remaining 100 times or 50 times), the effect control CPU 120 The execution ratio of various effects that can be executed may be lower than the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the normal state. Further, in this case, the execution rate of the effect of 1 is lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but may be higher than the execution rate in the time saving state B (execution rate of the effect of 1; normal state (remaining). Number of times 101 times or more)> Normal state (remaining number of times 100 times or less)> Time saving state B).

In addition, the remaining variable display number of times until controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, remaining 100 times or 50 times). Occasionally, the contents of the above items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to the contents corresponding to the time saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness until the time saving state B is controlled.

In addition, the period during which the remaining variable display number of times until controlled by the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is a specific number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times or 10 times) or less. When the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the low-expected effect (for example, SP reach effect A, weak pattern notice effect, etc.) may be increased.

(Variable display mode of design)
Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol and the small symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-51 to 11-55. 11-51 is a timing chart showing a variable display mode of a symbol in a probabilistic state, a time-saving state A out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern, and (B) a time-saving state B out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern. .. FIG. 11-52 is an example of the effect of the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. FIG. 11-53 is an example of the effect of the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. FIG. 11-54 is an example of the effect of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern of the time saving state B. FIG. 11-55 is an example of the production operation of SP reach E and SP reach D.

In the present embodiment, each decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is lower than the number display unit 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9" and the number display unit 069SG051. It is composed of a pedestal display unit 069SG052 displayed on the display layer (rear side) of the above. On the other hand, the left small symbol, the small and medium small symbol, and the right small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are only from the numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative symbols. It is composed. The decorative symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

The variable display mode of the variation pattern (for example, non-reach type out-of-reach variation pattern) in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R of the decorative pattern is a normal state, a probabilistic change state / time saving state A, and a time saving state B. It is different from the case of. Hereinafter, regarding the variable display mode of the decorative symbol based on the non-reach type out-of-reach variation pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, the probabilistic state / time saving state A, the timing of FIGS. 11-51 (A). It will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-52 and 11-53 based on the chart. Since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the non-reach system loss in the normal state, the probabilistic state / time saving state A is common, FIG. 11-52 describes the shortened non-reach loss variable display mode in the probabilistic state as an example. do.

As shown in FIGS. 11-51 (A), in the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the decorative symbols and small symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R are variable. The displays are started simultaneously (all at once) (see FIGS. 11-52 (A)). That is, the starting order of the variable display of each decorative symbol is the same. In addition, each decorative symbol becomes "medium speed" at the timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "low speed", and further becomes "high speed" which is the maximum speed at the timing ta3 when the predetermined time has elapsed. After that, it is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small symbol is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. The maximum speed of the decorative symbol, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small symbol, "high speed", may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative symbol changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. .. Then, at the timing ta4 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-52 (B)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-52 (C)), the original size. The decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L at the timing of returning to (see FIG. 11-52 (D)).

Next, at the timing ta5 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-52 (E)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), the original size. The decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R at the timing of returning to (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at the timing ta6 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-53 (H)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), the original size. At the timing ta6 when returning to, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R have a temporary stop display mode (for example, from the provisional stop display to the stop display based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. , Swing mode, etc.).

Then, at the timing ta7 (the timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing ta6 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small symbols are simultaneously displayed. The stop display is displayed (all at once) (see FIG. 11-53 (K)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific operation. Further, at the timing ta7 when the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at the timing ta8 when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing ta7 when the small symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, a variable display mode of the non-reach type out-of-reach decorative symbol in the time saving state B will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-54 based on the timing chart of FIGS. 11-51 (B). Since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the non-reach system in the time saving state B is common, FIGS. 11-54 will explain the variable display mode of the shortened non-reach in the time saving state B as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 11-51 (B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the ultra-shortened non-reach loss in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, 5R is displayed. It is started at the same time (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54 (A)). That is, the starting order of the variable display of each decorative symbol is the same. Further, each decorative symbol is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at the timing tb2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small symbol is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing tb1 of the variable display. The maximum speed of the decorative symbol, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small symbol, "high speed", may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display is approaching, the variable display speed of each decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C becomes "medium speed" at the same time (all at once), and the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5C are reached. At the timing tb3 in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time (simultaneously), a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-54 (B)). The variable display speed of the decorative symbol may be changed from "high speed" to "low speed" without going through "medium speed". Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, the specific operation display (stop display action) that returns to the original size is not performed, and a predetermined time elapses from the timing tb3 in which each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At the timing tb4 (timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle, and right small symbols are simultaneously (simultaneously) stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 11-54 (C)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific operation. Further, at the timing tb4 at which the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at the timing tb5 in which the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing tb4 in which the small symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A. The time saving state B may be shorter than the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. Further, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes "high speed" is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, but in the time saving state B and the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It may be common with A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A (left, middle, right). The present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the left, middle, and right are shown. While the decorative symbols are displayed horizontally side by side and stopped, in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at different positions in the vertical direction. The mode may be different from the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A (variable display in the vertical direction). ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the display is variable in the vertical direction, while in the time saving state B, the display is variably displayed in the horizontal direction. Variable display in the time saving state B, such as variable display, or variable display of decorative patterns is reduced to the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by ally characters, enemy characters, etc. are continuously displayed on the display screen. The mode may be different from the variable display mode in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A.

As described above, the start order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A, and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the time-saving state B. The time required for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. (Tb1 to tb2 <ta1 to ta3). Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the stop display in the order of left → right → middle in the case of the probabilistic change state and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state A, and the time reduction is achieved. In the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time reduction state A, and a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time reduction state B. Although it is common to all cases, the time from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area of 1 of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is in a probable state. , The case where the non-reach deviation variation pattern is in the time saving state A and the case where the non-reach deviation variation pattern is in the time saving state B may be different. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is 3 times because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. In the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so that it is once. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be common between the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time reduction state A and the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time reduction state B. good. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B, the specific operation display (the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern) is performed. The symbol stop action) is not performed. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the effect of the effect is enhanced by the specific operation display, while in the time saving state B, the specific operation display is not executed, so that a smooth variable display can be realized.

Further, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is common to the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A and the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the time reduction state B. While enhancing the effect of the display, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the mode of the specific operation display between the probabilistic state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B.

In addition, the period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the small symbol is the non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time reduction state A in the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B. {T1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)}, which is shorter than the case where. Therefore, a smooth variable display can be realized in the time saving state B.

Further, the symbol confirmation period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display. The symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display, is It is common. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the control considering the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the specific operation display of each decorative symbol exemplifies an operation display in which the display is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to the original size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode is not limited to this. Is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. Further, in the specific operation display, since the specific operation display is performed only on the pedestal display unit 069SG052 and the specific operation display is not performed on the number display unit 069SG051, the effect is enhanced by the specific operation display while ensuring the visibility of the identification information. However, the numerical display unit 069SG051 may also display the specific operation together with the pedestal display unit 069SG052. Further, the specific operation mode may be different depending on each decorative symbol having a different number.

Further, in the above, the non-reach loss variation pattern of the shortened system and the non-reach loss variation pattern of the non-shortening system exemplify a mode in which the variable display mode is common, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the variable display mode may be different between the non-reach loss variation pattern of the shortened system and the non-reach loss variation pattern of the non-shortening system.

Further, with respect to the decorative symbol in the time saving state B, the display position may be different between the time when the variable display is started and the time when the variable display is stopped. By doing so, the variable display is preferably performed even in a short variable display period. I can show you.

Further, instead of accelerating the variable display speed of the decorative symbol until it reaches the maximum speed as in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is changed to a mode that is difficult to see (for example, a blackish mode) during the variable display, and The variable display with a sense of speed may be realized by changing from a mode that is difficult to see when the decorative symbol is stopped to a normal mode.

Next, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP reach E, the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (FIG. 11-55). (Refer to (B)), the decorative symbol is decelerated and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the reach notice and the button notice are executed (see FIG. 11-55 (C)), and the decorative symbol is displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R. Is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R is enlarged to the original size and then returned to the original size. The return reach specific operation display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not particularly shown, when a jackpot notification is performed via the SP reach effect, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (FIG. 11). -55 (F)). After that, the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then the jackpot specific operation display that returns to the original size is performed. (See FIG. 11-55 (G)), the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP reach D, the variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-55 (I)), and the reach mode is not displayed in advance in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. A fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a temporary stop (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then the jackpot specific operation display that returns to the original size is performed. (See FIG. 11-55 (G)), the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E variation pattern, the reach specific operation display that specifically operates the decorative symbol when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode and the decorative symbol are stopped at the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination. The second specific operation display that causes the decorative symbol to perform a specific operation when displayed is feasible, and in the variation pattern of SP reach E via the reach, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display are executed. However, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through the reach, the reach specific operation display is not executed and the jackpot specific operation display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time saving state B, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, after the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 11-55 (I), the reach mode is not displayed and the decorative pattern is shown as shown in FIG. 11-55 (F). An example is an example in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the variable display is started, the present invention is not limited to this. By the time the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed, the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 is dropped may be executed without any operation by the player. ..

(Display mode of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns are compared. FIG. 11-56 is a diagram comparing examples of production operations of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns. FIGS. 11-57 are diagrams for comparing the production operation examples of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. In the following, a detailed operation example of the specific operation display executed when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11-56, when the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns of the shortened system are compared, first, in the "ultra-shortened non-reach" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are each. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed at the same time (see FIG. 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11-56 (B1)). reference). Next, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)). The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

In this way, regarding the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, in the probabilistic state and the shortened time state A, the variable display time is shortened non-reach A of "3 seconds", and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and middle. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds", which is an ultra-shortened non-reach, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time on the left, right, and middle.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-57, when the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns are compared, first, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in the probable change state, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are respectively. Variable display of is started at the same time. At this time, a "movable body notice" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the character image 069SG100C and the dialogue display 069SG431 composed of characters such as "reach?" Are displayed. "Notice" may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57 (A3)), the decorative symbol is decelerated and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a push is made. A button image 069SG441 imitating the button 31B and an operation promotion display 069SG442 such as "long press!" May be displayed, and a "button notice" for promoting the operation of the push button 31B may be executed (FIG. 11-). 57 (A4)). After that, a decorative symbol different from the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A5)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C without the reach mode. The variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (A6)).

Further, the “non-reach A” (see FIGS. 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time saving state A is a non-reach loss variation pattern that can be determined in the probabilistic state (FIG. 11-57 (A1)). )-(Refer to (A6)), and therefore the description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the time saving state B, after the variable display of the decorative symbols of each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. C1), the decorative symbol display area 5L. The variable display of each of the decorative symbols 5, 5C and 5R is stopped and displayed at the same time, and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (C2)).

As described above, regarding the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display time is common to "7 seconds" in the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, but in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, "movable body notice". , "Character notice", "Reach notice" and "Button notice" have a high execution rate, while in the time saving state B, "Movable body notice", "Character notice", "Reach notice" and "Button" The execution rate of various effects such as "notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation patterns will be compared. FIG. 11-58 is a diagram comparing examples of production operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. FIGS. 11-59 are diagrams for comparing production operation examples of the super reach fluctuation pattern. FIG. 11-60 is a diagram comparing an example of an effect operation of a post-effect in a super reach fluctuation pattern.

Hereinafter, when the super reach fluctuation patterns are compared based on FIGS. 11-58 and 11-59, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach E" that can be determined in the time saving state A, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C Variable display of each of the decorative symbols of 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the character image 069SG100C and the dialogue display 069SG431 composed of characters such as "Maybe reach !!" are displayed. A "character notice" may be executed (see FIG. 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not particularly shown, "reach notice" or "button notice" may be executed when the reach mode is adopted.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 including a character image and a character display such as "SP reach effect E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). Further, at this time, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle effect" in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other is started (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Then, a predetermined time has passed since the battle production was started, and the final confrontation is reached (see FIGS. 11-59 (A6) (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display 069SG452 such as "charge start!", And a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed as an operation promotion effect for promoting a long press operation of the push button 31B. "Win / fail button effect" is executed (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If a long press operation by the player is detected within the operation valid period in which the operation promotion display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

Further, before displaying the button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B within or immediately before the effect period of the pass / fail button effect, a pre-effect (for example, a condensing effect in which light gathers at a position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed). Etc.) may be executable. Further, it is preferable that such a pre-effect is not executed in the time saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation promotion display 069SG452 was started, the display of the operation promotion display 069SG452 is changed to "Release !!" and the operation release of the push button 31B is promoted. At the same time, the gauge display 069SG453 displays the operation opening operation time (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, the ally character attacks at the timing when the release of the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by the time when the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the release of the pressing operation. Image 069SG455 representing the image 069SG455 is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body effect is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character and the movable body 32 are displayed. A movable body effect image 069SG456 consisting of an effect image for emphasizing is displayed, and after the movable body 32 has fallen from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), the enemy character is defeated and the ally. A notification image 069SG457 indicating that the character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)), and the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By displaying it, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When the jackpot is notified, as shown in FIGS. 11-60, the background image is switched and displayed on the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot gaming state are displayed. The number counter display 069SG460 is displayed and the post-production is started (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image in which the ally character attacks the enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 069SG461 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is the planned number of balls. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B and, for example, "press !!" The operation promotion display 069SG452 and the gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation valid period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect for promoting a single push operation of the push button 31B is executed (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, at the timing when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by the time when the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the pressing operation, the ally character attacks and the scheduled ball is launched. The counter value of the number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of planned balls that can be acquired in the case of "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being updated, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the scheduled number is announced. The counter value displayed on the ball number counter display 069SG460 is updated and displayed after a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500") (see FIG. 11-60 (D10)), and then is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

If the variable display result is off, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the production position, and the enemy character is not defeated, although not shown in detail. When the ally character is defeated in the battle and the combination of the misaligned symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order (Fig. 11-59 (Fig. 11-59). See D4)).

Returning to FIGS. 11-58, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of "SP reach C" that can be determined in the probabilistic state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11). -58 (B1)). Then, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display is started (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the same effect as in FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (A3 to A7) was performed without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode (see FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (B3 to B6)), and then FIG. 11 -59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIGS. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the productions of FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIGS. 11-58, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of "SP reach D" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11-58). 11-58 (C1)). Then, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display is started (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, after the same effect as in FIG. 11-58 (A5) is performed without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode and the effect of FIG. 11-58 (A4) being performed (FIG. 11-58). (See (C3)), the same effect as in FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed without the effect of FIGS. 11-59 (A8 to A9) (see FIGS. 11-59 (C4 to C5)). ). Then, the effects of FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) described above are performed.

(Example of control operation of super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, control operation examples of the jackpot fluctuation patterns of SP reach E, C, and D will be compared based on FIGS. 11-61. 11-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operation in SP reach E, C, and D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to (C), the SP reach E, C, and D are acquired in the variable display part that executes the variable display of the decorative symbol and in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It consists of a post-production part that informs the number of possible planned balls. In the variable display part, when the variable display is started, the above-mentioned "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", "button notice", etc. are executed, and after the reach mode is reached, the SP reach effect is produced. "Battle production" and "short battle production" are executed. Then, after the "hit / miss button effect" as the operation promotion effect is started in the "decision effect" at the timing ta1, the "movable body effect" is started at the timing ta2. After that, after the results of the "battle effect" and the "short battle effect" are notified, the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing ta3, and the jackpot specific operation display (big hit symbol stop action). After (see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing ta4 to notify that the jackpot has been achieved. After that, the post-production is executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP reach E that can be determined in the time saving state A, 40 seconds for SP reach C that can be determined in the probabilistic state, and SP reach that can be determined in the time saving state B. In D, it is 25 seconds. On the other hand, the time (ta5 to ta6) of the post-production part is 15 seconds for each of SP reach E, C, and D.

That is, while the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the variable display part are different. The variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-effect part in the probabilistic state and the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-effect part in the time-saving state B are common to the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state and the time-saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the post-production part while enhancing the production effect by making various effects in the variable display part different.

Further, while the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the variable display part are different. Since the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the probabilistic state and the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the time saving state B are common, there is a difference in various effects in the variable display part. It is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the display time of the jackpot specific operation display while enhancing the effect of the effect.

The execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the "hit / fail button effect" is common to SP reach C and D, and only SP reach E is different.

Further, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and generates the image data (display data) in the display image creation area. Extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc.) as control information for movable bodies for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. when performing display processing for outputting image data (display data) as a video signal. ("X" is an arbitrary number)) and extended commands as control information for lamps for turning on / off movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. (for example, extended command BXXX ("X"). Is an arbitrary number)) and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Based on the reception of the above-mentioned extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the effect control CPU 120 uses the operation control execution data of the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B described in the process data. Separately from the operation control based on the operation control, the operation control for operating the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B is started in the operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the extended command BXXX or the like separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data based on the reception of the extended command BXXX or the like. The control for turning on / off the movable LED 208 is started in the lighting pattern (see, for example, the light emission pattern shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) in the feature unit 018SG).

Further, the control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B and the control data for lighting the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, control data used for operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200). And the control data (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the extension command as the control information for the movable body for operating the movable body 32, the push button 31B, etc. (for example, the extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (“X” is an arbitrary number)) , Separately from the extended command (for example, extended command BXXX etc. (“X” is an arbitrary number)) as control information for the lamp for turning on / off the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and the like. Although the generated form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in order to turn on / off the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. in the “movable body effect” or the like. Based on the extended command B000 as control information for the lamp, lighting / extinguishing control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and control for the movable body such as the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are executed. It may be done. That is, lighting control and operation control may be executed using common control information (extended command).

Further, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state, and the "movable" in the case of the big hit in the time saving state B. The development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "body effect".

Further, control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state ( For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) and control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. By sharing with (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), the development cost can be reduced.

Further, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body operation control and the LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extended command for the movable body operation control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. The control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended command used for the movable body effect is divided into the extended command for moving body operation control and the extended command for LED lighting control, one of the extended commands may be missed due to a defect, but it is common. This makes it possible to suitably produce a movable body.

In addition, an effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). And the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). By being common, the development cost can be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-62. 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display in the super reach loss variation pattern is that of the decorative symbol in the non-reach loss variation pattern. It is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of the variable display to the stop display.

Further, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern is the period (tb0) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. Since the variable display is completed in a shorter period than the period until the reach mode is reached by being shorter than tb3), it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display is the left in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from the start to the stop display, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the predetermined row ends in a short period. A suitable time saving state B can be provided.

(Rush production)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the rush effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-63 and 11-64. 11-63 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the rush introduction effect in FIGS. 11-63 and the effect of the time-saving rush effect A in FIG. 11-D. 11-64 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of (A1) to (A4) for the probabilistic rush effect, and (B1) to (B4) for the time-saving rush effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C), in the "rush introduction effect", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" is configured. Character images 069SG470B are framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 by a predetermined number (for example, one character) and are moved and displayed to the center of the display screen.

Then, the effect image 069SG470A, which is displayed at maximum and the display color is changed, and the character image 069SG470B, which is composed of the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" gathered in the center of the display screen, are displayed. By performing the "rush effect A", it is notified that the control of the time saving state A is started.

Further, in the case of the "probability change rush effect", after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (A1), the characters consisting of "poles" and the effect image After the probabilistic variation image 069SG471 having a predetermined transmittance of It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-64 (A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability change rush effect" is performed in which the rush image 069SG472 consisting of the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image 069SG471 which is displayed at the minimum size and the transmittance is 0% at the lower left of the display screen is displayed. , It is notified that the control of the probabilistic state is started (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

Further, in the case of the "time saving rush effect B", the "rush introduction effect" described in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and the 900th time when the control start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied. After the inrush image 069SG470 of FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed when the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the variable display of is completed is displayed, FIG. 11-64 (B1) shows. As shown, the playtime image 069SG473A having a predetermined transmittance consisting of a character consisting of "1100" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the inrush image 069SG470, and then directed toward the lower left of the display screen. The image is moved and displayed while gradually reducing and decreasing the transmittance (see FIGS. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, the inrush image 069SG470, the playtime image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the lower left of the display screen with the minimum size and the transmittance of 0%, and the playtime image consisting of the characters "play". By performing the "time saving rushing effect B" in which the rushing image 069SG473 including the image 069SG473B is displayed, it is notified that the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the probability change rush effect. While the inrush image 069SG472 composed of the image 069SG471 is displayed, when the control of the time saving state B is started, the inrush image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B are displayed. In addition to displaying the common inrush image 069SG470, the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started are displayed.

Therefore, in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the probability change state and the time saving state A are controlled in the time saving rush effect B in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Not only the inrush image 069SG470 which is common to the time when it is started, but also the play time image 069SG473B which is not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started is displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B can be excited. ..

[Embodiment 2]
Next, the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-65 to 11-69. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of the variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the effect operation of SP reach D. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each gaming state. In the second embodiment, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described.

In FIGS. 11-65, (A) is a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) shows the number of reserved storages 1 to 3. Specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for out-of-case, (C) Specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit when the number of reserved storage is 0, (B) The specific example of the big hit when the number of reserved storage is 1 to 3. A specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach E and SP reach D. 90 determination values are assigned.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control CPU 120 as the variable display effect of the “short battle” described in the first embodiment. When the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the time saving state B while executing the "effect", the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the "short battle effect" as the variable display effect, but "immediately" described later. Execute "hit effect" or "full rotation effect".

Further, the variation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A is the reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display mode is changed to the reach mode after the variable display is started. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in the time saving state B is "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect" without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode after the variable display is started. Is a non-reach variation pattern that is executed.

Next, FIGS. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-44. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, and then shortens the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in step S069SGS277. If it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach advance notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278 is performed. Before the execution, the processes of steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D are executed.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and is the SP reach D variation pattern. In the case (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), the variable display effect pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display effect pattern determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the variable display effect pattern are extracted, and the variable display effect pattern determination table is used to determine the variable display effect pattern.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIGS. 11-67, when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)" for each of "immediate hit effect" and "full rotation effect", "big hit". Different determination values in the cases of "A and B (6R)" are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 11-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect" and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". Is assigned. When the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect" and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". Assigned.

As described above, when the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" are compared in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, they are not executed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, and are not executed in the time saving state B. It is a variable display effect that can be executed only in, and is executed in combination with the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A.

Further, the execution rate of the "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)". On the other hand, the execution rate of the "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)" is higher than the "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)". Is higher than the execution rate. In other words, if the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)", which is advantageous for the player because the number of planned balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state is larger than that of "big hit A, B (6R)", "immediate hit production". "Full rotation effect" is executed at a higher rate than.

Next, an example of the production operation of the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" will be described. When the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the reach mode, and then the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. As a result, a "short battle effect" is executed in which the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a jackpot (see FIGS. 11-58 to 11-59), but the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B. In this case, after the variable display is started, the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become the reach mode and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65, the "immediate hit effect" is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (FIG. 11-). 68 (see A1)), when a predetermined time elapses, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). ). After that, in the "decision effect", an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is executed by displaying a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "press !!", and a gauge display. The movable body effect image 069SG456 showing that the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed, and the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position is executed. (See FIG. 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-effect part, after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIGS. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65, the “full rotation effect” is performed after a blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display at the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (FIG. 11-68 (see B1)), in the third background image 069SG330, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the full rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state of being aligned with the fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination. (See FIG. 11-68 (B3)). After that, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIGS. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-effect part (design confirmation period), after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIGS. 11-68 (C1 to C7)). It is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the variable display is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot without going through the reach mode after the variable display is started. By executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" as the effect, the player can enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind without worrying about being fanned by the reach effect.

Further, in the "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B, such as the "button notice" and the "win / fail button effect" described in the first embodiment, "press! The operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B by displaying the operation promotion display and the gauge display such as "" and the operation effect that the player needs to operate the push button 31B are not executed. In the above, the player can suitably digest the variable display without promoting or performing troublesome operations.

(Various operation examples by game state)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time saving state A in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-69. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each gaming state. Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state", and "time saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, regarding the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode, in the “time saving state B”, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (C), the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3. In the case, the determination ratio of "SP reach D (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode is "90%", and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). When the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode is "5%", and in "time saving state A", FIG. 11-7 (C). As shown in the above, the determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the "SP reach D" is a reach fluctuation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

That is, the ratio (for example, 90%) in which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A. The rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined (for example, 5%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined without going through the reach mode in the probabilistic state (eg, 5%). 5%) higher than.

According to the item (D1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, it is not determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, the jackpot game state is controlled without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the ratio at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined is the reach mode in the time saving state A or the probability variation state. Although a form higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state B. May determine the "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The effect control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach effect as an action promoting effect that encourages the player's operation, and as a specific effect that notifies the variable display result, for example, in the SP reach effect. "Movable body production" can be executed.

Then, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability change state or the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the “hit / fail button effect” in the “decision effect” in the variable display of the SP reach D. While executing the first effect execution pattern for executing the "movable body effect" later, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the "immediate hit effect" in the variable display of the SP reach D. In, the second effect execution pattern that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" is executed.

Therefore, regarding the execution ratio of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the figure in the "time saving state B" is shown in the figure. As shown in 11-65 (C), the number of reserved storage is "90%" when the number of reserved storage is 0 to 3, and in the "probability change state", the number of reserved storage is as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). In the case of 0 to 3, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), it is "0%" when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3.

That is, the execution rate (for example, 90%) of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state B is the time reduction state A. In the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win / fail button effect", and in the probable change state, the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is "win / fail". It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing "movable body effect" without executing "button effect".

According to the item (D2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B because it is less likely to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B when the notification is made.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B is the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A or the probable change state. Although a form higher than the ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "immediate hit" is performed in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. The ratio of executing "effect" or "full rotation effect" may be 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of reserved storages is 0, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds) is ". In the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), it is "100%" when the number of reserved storages is 0, and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). , When the number of reserved storage is 0, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), it is "0%" when the number of reserved storage is 0.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages is 0, the CPU 103 shortens. The variable display time is longer than the non-reach fluctuation pattern. The ratio for determining (reach fluctuation, etc.) is “0%” in the “time saving state B” when the number of reserved storages is 0, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), and is “0%” in the “probability change state”. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the number of reserved storage is 0, it is “100%”, and in the “time saving state A”, the number of reserved storage is as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A). In the case of 0, it is "100%".

That is, when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A, the CPU 103 has a long variable display time for gaining time for storing the reserved storages in the second reserved storages (for example, the variable time). While it is possible to determine non-reach of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation of 25 seconds or 40 seconds of fluctuation time, when the reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state B, the variable display time is a long deviation fluctuation pattern ( For example, a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern with a shorter variable display time than non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds (for example, a fluctuation time of more than 1.5 seconds). Shortened non-reach) can be determined.

According to the item (D3), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, even when the reserved storage number is 0, considering that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. An out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, non-reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is determined and the digestion speed of the variable display is determined. Is not reduced, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, "big hit A" and "big hit B" in which a 6R round game is executed are more advantageous to the player than "big hit A" and "big hit B" (for example,). , That is, the number of rounds, that is, the number of planned balls that can be obtained is large), and either "big hit C" can be determined (see FIG. 11-3 (D)).

Further, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 has a special variable display pattern as a special variable display pattern in which the jackpot symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed. "Full rotation effect" can be executed.

Further, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the SP reach D big hit fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the effect control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation effect" is shown in the figure in the "time saving state B". As shown in 11-67, it is "90%", and in the "probability change state", it is "0%" as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C) ("full rotation effect" is not executed), and "time reduction". In "state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed).

That is, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the ratio (for example, 100%) that the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" is the big hit in the time saving state A. When "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the type, it is higher than the rate at which the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" (for example, 0% (non-execution)), and the big hit type in the probability change state. It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation effect” when the “big hit C (10R)” is determined.

According to the item (D4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the number of rounds is larger than that of the big hit A and the big hit B in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. When it is decided to control the jackpot C, which is highly advantageous for many players, it is a special variable display that is not executed (or the execution rate is low) in the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A. Since the "rotation effect" is easily executed, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In the present embodiment, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the ratio of the effect control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation effect" is 100%. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation effect” when the “big hit C (10R)” is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B. If the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A or the probability change state, it is less than 100%. It may be executed at a rate. Further, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full rotation effect".

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature part 069SG)
In the feature unit 069SG, as an example of the "advantageous state advantageous for the player", a mode in which the big hit gaming state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic state and the small hit gaming state are not limited thereto. , Reach state, pseudo-ream effect state, hold ream, chance-up effect, pre-reading notice effect, time reduction loss, ceiling time reduction control, etc. may be included.

Further, the feature unit 069SG exemplifies a form in which a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine capable of being controlled to a probable change state for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit is not limited to this. When the type is a probabilistic jackpot, it may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled in a probabilistic state from the end of the jackpot game until it is controlled by the next jackpot, or it may be in a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed until the probabilistic fall lottery is won. It may be a controlled pachinko gaming machine. Further, a so-called type 1 or 2 type of gaming machine that can be controlled to the big hit gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in the short time state after the big hit game may be applied, and the game playability is variously changed. It is possible.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a special state in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in the non-special state (for example, the normal state), the time saving state A, the probabilistic change state, and the time saving state B are applied. The invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of gaming states other than the above may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a first special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state, a low probability / low base state) ends, and an advantageous state in the non-special state. As the second special state controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled by, the time saving state A (first special state) and the time saving state B (relief time saving (relief time saving)) based on low accuracy and high. Although the embodiment to which the second special state)) is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high accuracy and high base probability variation state (first special state) and the low accuracy and high base time saving state B. (Relief time reduction (second special state)) may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a probabilistic state is applied is exemplified as a third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. Is not limited to this, for example, in the case of one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines, a time saving state different from the time saving state as the first special state {for example, execution of a time saving state than the first special state A time saving state with a large number of times (long control period) may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, at least one special state with the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state has, for example, a plurality of types having different execution times of time saving control, execution frequency of variable display, and the like. It may have a special condition.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is applied as a non-special state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is more variable than the special state. As long as the game state has a low execution frequency, the game state is not limited to the low probability / low base state, and may be a high definite base state, a low probability / high base state, or the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, the time saving state B (relief time saving state) as the second special state is variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in the non-special state. Although the embodiment controlled by the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be variously changed. Further, it may be controlled when another condition other than the above-mentioned condition is satisfied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, in the time saving state B, the time saving state A, the average normal map fluctuation time (the period during which the normal map is changed) in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, the first. 2 The average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) in the time saving state B is changed to the probabilistic state without changing the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the starting winning opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the time saving state B. In, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed), the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (high opening control, By making at least one of the high base control) different from the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) may be further improved.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, the CPU 103 deviates from the variable display mode as the specific mode (for example, the reach mode) as the variation pattern and displays the display result in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A"). An example of a form in which a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach loss") that displays the deviation display result without setting the variable display mode to a specific mode can be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include fluctuation patterns of types other than the above. Further, as the variation pattern, the first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result out of the specific mode (for example, reach mode) of the variable display mode is used. A second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the misaligned display result without setting the variable display mode to a specific mode is determined. Although possible embodiments have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include variation patterns of types other than the above.

Further, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", and is, for example, a "chance eye mode (eg," 133 ")", a "pseudo-ream mode (eg, 122, etc.)", and a "normal reach mode". It may include various aspects such as "aspects" and "super reach aspects".

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, a mode in which the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. If it is a production that suggests that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, it includes various productions such as a stop symbol notice, a pseudo-ream notice, a dialogue notice, an operation notice, a reach notice, and a look-ahead notice. You may be.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", and "design chance eye notice" are used as pre-reading notice effects suggesting that the hold memory stored in the hold memory is controlled in an advantageous state. , The embodiment to which the "effect display notice" is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various reading notices such as "continuous effect" and "precursor effect". good.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which a "button notice" or a "hit / miss button effect" is applied as an operation promoting effect for encouraging a player's operation is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above is not limited to this. It may include various effects other than. Further, the "player's operation" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, and is an effect or operation that encourages the operation of other operation means (for example, a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B. Instead, it may be an effect that encourages the movement (movement) of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" are examples of the first effect execution pattern in which the "hit / fail button" as the operation promotion effect is executed and then the "movable body effect" is executed as the specific effect. As an example of the second effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed without executing the operation promotion effect, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, other operation promotion effects such as "button notice" may be applied as movement promotion effects, and effects other than "movable body effects" (for example, battle results in SP reach effects) may be applied as specific effects. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a first motion promotion effect for encouraging the player to perform one motion, an embodiment in which the operation promotion display of the "blow" operation is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It does not encourage the player to perform a single push operation, but may encourage the player to perform a single pull operation, a rotation operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which the operation promotion display of the "continuous hit" or "long press" operation is applied as the second operation promotion effect for urging the player to perform the operation over a predetermined operation period is illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and may promote a pulling operation, a rotating operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like over a predetermined operation period. Further, the operation over a predetermined operation period is not necessarily limited to the operation detected continuously, and may include an operation performed intermittently, an operation according to a predetermined pattern, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a "character notice" or a "reach notice" is applied as a production including a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is set as a specific mode is exemplified, but the present invention has this. It is not limited to the above, but it is a production that encourages "chance eye mode (for example," 133 ")", "pseudo-ream mode (for example, 122 etc.)", "normal reach mode", and "super reach mode". It may include various effects such as.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, in the post-production, a form is provided in which the planned number of balls is notified as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state in which control is notified in the specific effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 6R, 10R, etc.) may be notified. In addition, in a state where a big hit occurs in a continuous villa in a probable change state, the planned total number of balls to be released in this big hit and the total number of balls acquired in the predetermined consecutive villa period of the big hit are added. The number of balls may be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, the rush introduction effect and the probability change rush effect are displayed as the special state start effect of notifying the start of the control of the special state by displaying the special state start display. , The time-saving rushing effect A, the time-saving rushing effect B, and the shutter effect are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various rushing effects other than the above may be feasible. Further, the effect mode of each rush effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which the probabilistic rushing effect and the time-saving rushing effect A are set as separate effects is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic rushing effect and the time-saving rushing effect A are described. May be used as a common 1 rush effect.

Further, the feature unit 069SG exemplifies a mode in which the rush introduction effect is not executed when the time saving rush effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rush introduction effect is provided instead of the shutter effect. You may want to do it. Further, the rush introduction effect may be executed even when the time saving rush effect B is executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the troublesomeness of the effect, it is preferable to use the rush introduction effect in which the effect period is shorter than that in the case of executing the probabilistic rush effect or the time-saving rush effect A.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as an example of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the player has a higher advantage than the first advantageous state, the jackpots A and B (which have different numbers of game rounds in the jackpot gaming state) ( Although the embodiment in which the first advantageous state) and the jackpot C (second advantageous state) are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage for the player is higher than that of the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state is not only a big hit in which the player has a high advantage in the big hit game state such as the number of game rounds and the number of planned balls that can be obtained, but also the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player. It may be a big hit (for example, a big hit with a long time reduction control after the big hit game state, or a big hit controlled by a "small hit rush" in which the execution frequency of the small hit game state becomes high after the end of the big hit). ..

(Explanation of feature 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-22. In the feature section 099SG, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described. Further, the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG is formed on the left side of the image display device 5 in the gaming board 2 in a left gaming region where the gaming ball can flow down. The right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where the game ball can flow down. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 099SG, the gaming ball that is weakly launched by the launching device due to the normal gaming state flows down the first path of the left gaming region, and the gaming state is shortened. The gaming ball strongly launched by the launcher due to any one of A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state, flows down the second path of the right gaming area. Further, a part of the game ball flowing down the second path of the right game area can pass through the gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and the gate can be passed. The variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passage of 41. Then, based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (a normal symbol hit), the second start winning opening provided on the second path changes from the closed state to the open state, and the second start is performed. A game ball can be won at the winning opening. In this feature unit 099SG, "variable display" may be described as "variable" or "variable display".

FIG. 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11 in the feature unit 099SG. As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), in the feature unit 099SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C" when the variable display result is "big hit". For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "299".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to "0" to ". It takes a value in the range of "99".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number value used for determining the initial value of the random number value MR4, and takes a value in the range of “3” to “23”.

FIG. 12-1 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 099SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 099SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 099SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1 / 319.68 in the feature unit 099SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher (in the feature section 099SG). About 1 / 80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

12-1 (C1) and 12-1 (C2) show a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) shows the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the variable display result as a “big hit” to the jackpot gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Based on this, it is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B, and FIG. 12-1 (C2) shows the variable display result as "big hit" when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot B and the jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 099SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-1 (D). In this feature unit 099SG, as the jackpot type, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, in which time saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state, are provided. Further, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are maximum after the end of the jackpot game by winning the V winning slot after the game ball wins the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probabilistic control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this feature unit 099SG, in the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid), a short open state (for example, 0.1 second) in which the open state is short and a long open state in which the open state is long are long. There is a state (eg, 15 seconds). In the jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. And.

In the big hit game state by "Big hit A", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit A", it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V winning opening because the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round, and the probability variation control may be executed. You can't expect it, so it's a real normal jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit B", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit B", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control may be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit C", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit C", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are two or less or two or less. Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

That is, in this feature unit 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. After the jackpot game is over, both probability variation control and time saving control are performed. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state, so that the probability change control is performed after the big hit game is completed. And time saving control are both implemented.

In this feature unit 099SG, even if a big hit A is obtained, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in the short open state, but it is extremely rare. Will be described as assuming that the V prize is not won and the probability variation control is not executed. Further, even in the case of big hit B and big hit C, it is extremely rare that V prize is not given when the V lid is in the long open state, so it becomes big hit B and big hit C. If this is the case, it will be described as assuming that the V prize is won and the probability variation control is executed.

In the present feature unit 099SG, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

FIG. 12-2 (A) shows whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per normal symbol) based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. It is a normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether, and FIG. 12-2 (B) shows the normal symbol when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is a normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit).

The time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG is variable 900 times without being controlled to the big hit gaming state in the normal state (low probability / low base state in which neither probability variation control nor time saving control is executed). It is a gaming state controlled when the display is executed, and is a time saving state A (low accuracy / high base state) in which the time saving control is executed over a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), 3 of the range 3 to 13 of the random number values MR4 for normal symbol hit determination are assigned to hits, and 4 to 13 are assigned to outliers. ing. On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), 3 to 12 of the range 3 to 13 of the random number values MR4 for the ordinary symbol hit determination are assigned to the hit, and 13 is assigned to the hit. It is assigned to the outlier. That is, in this feature unit 099SG, the ratio per normal figure when the game state is any of the time saving state A, the probabilistic change state, and the time saving state B is higher than the ratio per normal figure when the gaming state is the normal state. Is also set high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the gaming state is the normal state is set to 60 seconds, whereas the gaming state is the time saving state A and the probable change state. , The fluctuation time of the normal symbol in any of the time saving states B is set to 0.1 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the opening time of the second starting winning opening is set to 0.1 seconds when a normal drawing hit occurs when the gaming state is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the game state is any of the time saving state A, the probability changing state, and the time saving state B, the opening time of the second start winning opening is set to 3 seconds when a normal figure hit occurs.

That is, in the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG, "the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high", "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short", and "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short" as compared with the normal state. Since the opening time of the second starting winning opening is long when a normal symbol hits, it is easy for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently executed. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B have "high probability of hitting a normal symbol" and "normal" as compared with the normal state. Variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the conditions of "the variable display time of the symbol is short" and "the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal symbol hits is long". The execution frequency of may be set high.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 11-1) in the feature section 069SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 099SG is the same as the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 069SG. While the pachinko ball can win the first start winning opening, it is impossible to win the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, pass through the gate 41, etc., and the game ball shortens the time. In any of the state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B, the player can launch the game ball toward the right game area 2R so that the game ball can win a prize in the second start winning opening and the gate 41. It is possible to pass through. When the game state is a big hit game state, the player launches the game ball toward the right game area, so that the game ball can win a prize in the second start winning opening and the big winning opening and the gate. It is possible to pass through 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 (A), the game ball launched toward the left game area 2L when the game state is in the normal state is started and won by a plurality of nails or the like arranged on the game board 2. The probability of winning a game ball to the first start winning opening is about 5.5% (continuation by operating the player's hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). The condition is that the game ball is launched into the left game area 2L). Further, when the game state is the normal state, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbol due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely 60 seconds. In addition to being long, the opening time of the second start winning opening is extremely short at 0.1 seconds when a hit occurs (see Fig. 12-2 (C) and Fig. 12-2 (D)). There is almost no winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), when the game state is any of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B, the game ball launched toward the right game area 2R has a gate 41. Since it is possible to pass through, the variable display time of the normal symbol by passing through the gate 41 is as short as 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal symbol hit occurs is 3 seconds ( (See FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D)), the probability of winning a game ball to the second starting winning opening is about 55% (player's hitting operation handle (operation knob). The condition is that the game ball is continuously launched into the right game area 2R by the operation of 30).

FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol of the feature unit 099SG. In this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-3, as the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of order, the special figure fluctuation time is ultra-shortened non-reach of 1500 ms, and the special figure fluctuation time is shortened by 3000 ms. Reach A missed, special figure variation time shortened by 5000 ms Non-reach B missed, special figure variable time 7000 ms non-reach A missed, special figure variable time 12000 ms non-reach B missed, special figure variable time 45000 ms super reach A is out, Super Reach B with special figure fluctuation time is off 80,000 ms, Super Reach C with special figure fluctuation time is off 4000 ms, Super Reach D is off with special figure fluctuation time of 25,000 ms, and Super Reach E is off with special figure fluctuation time of 50,000 ms. Each fluctuation pattern of is provided. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern from the deviation of Super Reach A to the deviation of Super Reach E is also a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of Super Reach during the variable display.

Further, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 7,000 ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (the special figure variation time is 7,000 ms + 15,000 ms) without super reach. A jackpot, super reach reach effect is not executed 12000 ms variable display followed by 15,000 ms jackpot notification period (special figure fluctuation time 12000 ms + 15,000 ms) Super reach non-via B jackpot, super reach reach effect is executed 45,000 ms It has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display (special figure fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms), and has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 80,000 ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Super reach B jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 40,000 ms in which the reach effect of super reach is executed (special figure variation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms), super reach C jackpot, Super reach D jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (special figure fluctuation time is 25,000 ms + 15,000 ms) after a variable display of 25,000 ms in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, and a variable display of 50,000 ms in which the reach effect of super reach is executed. Each variation pattern of the super reach E jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (the special figure variation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms) is provided after. The fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is a fluctuation pattern that executes a boring effect to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by boring as a reach effect, and is a variation pattern of Super Reach B. , Super Reach C and Super Reach E are fluctuation patterns that execute a battle effect to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by performing a battle as a reach effect. As for the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D, as a reach effect, the ally character and the enemy character win a big hit by performing a shorter battle than the battle effect in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E. It is a fluctuation pattern that executes a short battle effect that informs whether or not it is present.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 099SG is a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-4, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 099SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 099SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 099SG153, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, a game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The upper limit of the hold data (hold storage) that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the gaming state. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The upper limit of the hold data (hold storage) that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the gaming state. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the first special figure reserved storage (the reserved storage that can be stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151A), and the second special figure reserved storage. Up to four hold storages can be stored as (hold storage that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

When executing the variable display, the CPU 103 first receives random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation storage unit 099SG151B when the second special symbol reservation storage exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). Is read, and then the storage content of the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is shifted. That is, when the numerical values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the hold storage of the hold number 1 of the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random number values as the hold storage of these hold numbers 1. While reading the values of MR1 to the random number value MR3, the hold memory of the hold number 1 is erased, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory of the hold number 2 is used as the hold memory of the hold number 1 and the hold memory of the hold number 3. The stored hold storage is re-stored as the hold storage of the hold number 2 and the hold storage stored as the hold storage of the hold number 4 as the hold storage of the hold number 3.

Further, when the reserved storage is not stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved storage exists. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A are shifted after reading the random number values MR1 to MR3 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A. That is, when the numerical values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the hold storage of the hold number 1 of the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random number values as the hold storage of these hold numbers 1. While reading the values of MR1 to the random number value MR3, the hold memory of the hold number 1 is erased, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory of the hold number 2 is used as the hold memory of the hold number 1 and the hold memory of the hold number 3. The stored hold storage is re-stored as the hold storage of the hold number 2 and the hold storage stored as the hold storage of the hold number 4 as the hold storage of the hold number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B (when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the random number value). After executing the jackpot type determination based on MR2), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 6), the variation pattern differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the judgment table.

That is, in the feature unit 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved storages obtained by subtracting 1 from the reserved storage immediately before the variable display in the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The normal figure hold storage unit 099SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 099SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table used when executing the variable display of the special symbol will be described. As shown in FIGS. 12-5 to 12-11, in the feature unit 099SG, the game state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the reserved storage number of the special symbol for executing the variable display of the special symbol are stored. It is possible to determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation for loss shown in FIG. 12-5 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach B deviation, super reach A deviation, and super reach B deviation using the pattern determination table A. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 97 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and 2 numerical values are assigned. Super reach A is assigned to the deviation pattern, and one numerical value is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach B. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of non-reach B loss at a rate of 97%. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is out of alignment at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B is determined to be out of alignment at a rate of 1%.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) is used. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the shortened non-reach B deviation, the super reach A deviation, and the super reach B deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table B, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and two numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach A, and one numerical value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach B. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 97%. It is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B is determined at a rate of 1%.

Further, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, it is common regardless of the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display (even when the number of reserved storages is any of 0 to 3). In), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the super reach non-via B jackpot, the super reach A jackpot, and the super reach B jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for jackpot determination, 10 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot B without super reach, and 40 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A jackpot, and 50 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B jackpot. That is, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the B jackpot without super reach at a rate of 10% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and the rate is 40%. Is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A jackpot, and is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B jackpot at a rate of 50%.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing variable display is 0, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 12-6 (A) is used. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, super reach C deviation, and super reach deviation D. In the deviation pattern determination table C, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach A deviation pattern, and two numerical values are assigned. Super reach C is assigned to the deviation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the change pattern is determined to be a non-reach A off change pattern at a rate of 95%. Then, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing variable display is one, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, super reach C deviation, and super reach D deviation using the table D. In the deviation pattern determination table D, 80 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 15 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-reach variation pattern, two numbers are assigned to the super-reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and three numbers are assigned to the super-reach D out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 80%. It is determined, 15% is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, 2% is determined to be a super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and 3% is determined to be a super reach D out-of-range variation pattern. To.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The variation pattern is shortened by using the table E. The variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A off, non-reach A off, super reach C off, and super reach D off. In the deviation pattern determination table E, 90 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-reach variation pattern, two numerical values are assigned to the super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 90%. It is determined, 5% is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, 2% is determined to be a super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and 3% is determined to be a super reach D out-of-range variation pattern. To.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the table F. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A, super reach C, and super reach D. In the deviation pattern determination table F, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation pattern, and two numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 95%. It is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the probabilistic state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the probabilistic state in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol is the first special figure). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is a probable change state and the variable display result is a big hit, the change pattern is not super-reached by using the big hit change pattern determination table B as shown in FIG. 12-7, regardless of the number of reserved storages. It is determined from the fluctuation patterns of via A jackpot, super reach C jackpot, and super reach D jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 5 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of the A jackpot not via Super Reach, and 80 numbers are assigned. Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C jackpot, and 15 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot. That is, when the game state is a probable change state and the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the A big hit without super reach is determined at a rate of 5% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and the super reach is determined at a rate of 80%. The fluctuation pattern of the C jackpot is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot is determined at a rate of 15%.

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern for loss is as shown in FIG. 12-8 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach A deviation and the super reach E deviation using the determination table G. In the deviation pattern determination table G, 95 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach A deviation variation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Super reach E is assigned to the deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach A loss fluctuation pattern at a rate of 95%. It is determined and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (B), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table H, and is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table H, 85 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 10 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super reach E out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 85%. Is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern at a rate of 10%, and a super reach E out-of-reach variation pattern is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table I, and is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In the variation pattern determination table I for deviation, 90 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super reach E out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 90%. At a rate of 5%, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of non-reach A, and at a rate of 5%, the fluctuation pattern of super reach E is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation.

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table J. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach A deviation and the super reach D deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table J, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 95%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the time saving state A, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the time saving state A in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (the first special if the first special symbol is variable display). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A in the figure, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A and the variable display result is the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is super-reached by using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table C as shown in FIG. 12-9, regardless of the number of reserved storages. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of non-via A jackpot and super reach E jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table C, 5 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of the A jackpot not via Super Reach, and 95 numbers are assigned. Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E jackpot. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state A and the variable display result is the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the super reach non-via A jackpot at a rate of 5% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and is 95%. The fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E jackpot is determined by the ratio.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern for loss is as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach B deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table K. In the deviation pattern determination table I, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and 3 numerical values are assigned. Super reach D is assigned to the deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern becomes the non-reach B out-of-reach fluctuation pattern at a rate of 97%. It is determined and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is the reduced working hours state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table L. In the deviation pattern determination table L, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns, and 3 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 97%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table M. In the deviation pattern determination table M, 99 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern, and one numerical value is used. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is a variation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 99%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 1%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (D), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined only from the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach by using the determination table N. In the deviation pattern determination table N, 100 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the reduced working hours state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 100%. Will be decided.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the time saving state B, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (the first special if the first special symbol is variable display). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A in the figure, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is super-reached by using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table D as shown in FIG. 12-11, regardless of the number of reserved storages. D Determine only the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table D, 100 of the possible numerical values of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach D jackpot. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot at a rate of 100% regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Here, the period values in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (A) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α, the period value α is A ×. It is calculated by the value of a + B × b + C × c + D × d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order, b. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of pieces is out of order, c is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 in the time saving state A, and d is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state A. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state A. The variable display period in which the variable display result in the feature unit 099SG is out of alignment refers to the period from the variable display start timing to the variable display end timing of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (B) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state B is the period value β, the period value β is E ×. It is calculated by the value of e + F × f + G × g + H × h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order, f. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of individual pieces is out of order, g is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding memories is 3 in the time saving state B, and h is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (C) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the probabilistic state is the period value γ, the period value γ is I × i + J. It is calculated by the value of × j + K × k + L × l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i is the case where the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation displays in the probability variation state, J is the average variation time when the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probability variation state, and j is the probability variation state. The ratio of the variation display when the second special figure holding memory is one to the 110 times variation display of the probability variation state, K is the variation display result when the number of the second special figure reservation storage is two in the probability variation state. The average fluctuation time is out of line, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two 2nd special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, and H is the 2nd special in the probabilistic state. Figure The average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is 3 and the variable display result is out of order, l is the 2nd special figure in the probabilistic state. It is the ratio to the display.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-13 (A) to 12-13 (C), the numerical values in the present feature are substituted into the algebras A to L and a to l, and the period value α in the time saving state A and the time saving state B are used. When the period value β and the period value γ in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value α is a value larger than the period value β, and the period value γ is a value larger than the period value β (α> β, γ>. β).

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. As shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of 1100 fluctuations in the case where the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α', the period value α'is It is calculated by the value of A × a'+ B × b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order. b'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, c'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state A, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state A. In the time saving state A, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3, and d'is 3 in the time saving state A. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (B) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state B is the period value β', the period value β'is It is calculated by the value of E × e'+ F × f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. f'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, g'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state B, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state B. H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B, and h'is 3 second special figure holding storage in the time saving state B. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (C) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the probabilistic state is the period value γ', the period value γ'is I. It is calculated by the value of × i'+ J × j'+ K × k'+ L × l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i'is when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j'is the probabilistic change. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation when the number of the second special figure holding storage is two in the probabilistic state. The average fluctuation time at which the display result is off, k'is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probability change state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability change state, and H is the probability change state. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is three, l'is the variation display when the second special figure reserved storage is three in the probabilistic state, and the variation display is the probabilistic state. It is a ratio to the fluctuation display of 1100 times.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-14 (A) to 12-14 (C) and 12-23, the period in the time saving state A by substituting the numerical values in this feature section into each algebra A to L and a'to l'. When the value α', the period value β'in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value α'is larger than the period value β', and the period value γ'is the period value β. (Α'> β', γ'> β').

Next, pay attention to the case where the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, so that the time saving state A changes every 110 times. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value δ, the period value δ is calculated by the value of D × 110. Here, as described above, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value ε, the period value ε is calculated by the value of H × 110. Here, as described above, H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. 2. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3 is the period value ζ, the period value ζ is calculated by the value of L × 110. Here, as described above, L is an average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probability variation state.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-15 (A) to 12-15 (C), the period value δ in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into each of the algebras D, H, L. When ε and the period value ζ in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is a value larger than the period value ε (δ> ε, ζ> ε). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations displayed in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value δ', the period value δ'is calculated by the value of D × 1100. .. Here, as described above, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value ε', the period value ε'is calculated by the value of H × 1100. .. Here, as described above, H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three is the period value ζ', the period value ζ'is calculated by the value of L × 1100. Here, as described above, L is an average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of alignment when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probability variation state.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-16 (A) to 12-16 (C), the period value δ'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras D, H, and L. When the value ε'and the period value ζ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value δ'is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ'is larger than the period value ε'(δ'). > Ε', ζ'> ε').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the period value of the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is two is η, the period value η is calculated by the value of C × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Fluctuation, average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved 2nd special figures is 2 When the fluctuation display of the 2nd special figure is always executed, 110 fluctuations are displayed Assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is two is the period value ι, the period value ι is calculated by the value of K × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-17 (A) to 12-17 (C), the period value η in the time-saving state A and the period value in the time-saving state B are substituted into the algebras C, G, and K in the present feature section. When θ and the period value ι in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η> θ, ι> θ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, thereby changing every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is two is the period value η', the period value η'is calculated by the value of C × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is two is the period value θ', the period value θ'is calculated by the value of G × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is two is the period value ι', the period value ι'is calculated by the value of K × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-18 (A) to 12-18 (C), the period value η'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras C, G, and K. When the value θ'and the period value ι'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value η'is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι'is larger than the period value θ'(η'. > Θ', ι'> θ').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value κ, the period value κ is calculated by the value of B × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value λ, the period value λ is calculated by the value of F × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. 2. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is one is the period value μ, the period value μ is calculated by the value of J × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras B, F, and J, the period value κ in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B. λ, when the period value μ in the probabilistic state is calculated, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ> λ, μ> λ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations displayed in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, thereby changing every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value κ', the period value κ'is calculated by the value of B × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value λ', the period value λ'is calculated by the value of F × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is one is set to the period value μ', the period value μ'is calculated by the value of J × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-20 (A) to 12-20 (C), by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras B, F, and J, the period value κ'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B. When the value λ'and the period value μ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value κ'is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ'is larger than the period value λ'(κ'. > Λ', μ'> λ').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ν, the period value ν is calculated by the value of A × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is the period value ξ, the period value ξ is calculated by the value of E × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, the change is 110 times every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is set to the period value π, the period value π is calculated by the value of I × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-21 (A) to 12-21 (C), the period value ν in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B are substituted by the numerical values in this feature section into the algebra A, E, and I. ξ, When the period value π in the probabilistic state is calculated, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π is a value larger than the period value ξ (ν> ξ, π> ξ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ν', the period value ν'is calculated by the value of A × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ξ', the period value ξ'is calculated by the value of E × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is set to the period value π', the period value π'is calculated by the value of I × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-22 (A) to 12-22 (C), the period value ν'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in this feature section into the algebras A, E, and I. When the value ξ'and the period value π'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value ν'is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π'is larger than the period value ξ'(ν'). > Ξ', π'> ξ').

Next, the actual firing values in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state (number of firing game balls, special figure 1 start) when the test firing test of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG was performed for 10 hours. Pachinko obtained from the number of winnings in the mouth, the number of winnings in the starting mouth of the special figure 2, the number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 1, the number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2, the total number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2, the total number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2) and the actual shooting values. The design values of the gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 12-24 (A) and 12-24 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the total time of the test firing test time in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state is less than 10 hours because the remaining time is in the big hit game state. Is it there? Further, the actual shooting value in the normal state is conditioned on the continuous launch of the game ball into the left game area 2L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30, and is in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state. The actual shooting value is conditioned on the continuous launch of the game ball into the right game area 2R by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), under the normal state, the test firing test time is 346.08 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 34580, the number of winnings in the special figure 1 starting port is 1939, and the number of winnings in the special figure 2 starting port is 1939. The number of winnings is 0, the number of times of special figure 1 variation is 1883, the number of times of special figure 2 variation is 0, the total number of special figure 1 variation is 23840 seconds, and the total number of special figure 2 variation is 0 seconds. Further, in the time saving state A, the test firing test time is 77.0 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 7676, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 4371, and special drawing 1 The number of times of variation display is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 658, the total number of times of variation of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 3548 seconds. Further, in the time saving state B, the test firing test time is 14.96 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 1494, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 821, and special drawing 1 The number of times of variation display is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 594, the total number of times of variation of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 954 seconds. In addition, in the probabilistic state, the test firing test time is 116.0 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 11515, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 6556, and the number of special drawing 1 fluctuations. The number of display times is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 987, the total change time of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total change time of special figure 2 is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, as a design value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), the number of firing game balls per minute in a normal state is 99.9 / Minutes, special figure 1 winning rate is 5.6 pieces / minute, special figure 2 winning rate is 0 pieces / minute, average special figure 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated as 0 seconds. ing. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the time saving state A is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, and the average special figure 1 The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the time saving state B is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 54.8 / minute, and the average special figure 1 The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated to be 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the probabilistic state is 99.9 / min, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / min, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / min, and the average special figure 1 variation. The time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated to be 4.445 seconds.

Comparing the special figure 2 winning rates of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state, only the special figure 2 winning rate of the time-saving state B is different, but this is due to the number of launching game balls in the time-saving state B. This is due to an error caused by less than the two states of.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in FIGS. 12-24.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result when the number of first special figure reservations is 0 is off, and the number of first special figure reservations are For the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of 1 is out of order, and the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of the first special figure hold storage number is out of 2, the first special figure hold storage number is 0. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the cases of 2 to 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-5 (A)), 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45,000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1 / It is calculated as 100 = 13340 (ms). Further, regarding the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of alignment when the first special figure reserved storage number is 3, the variation pattern that can be selected when the first special figure reserved storage number is 3 and these fluctuation patterns From the determination ratio (see FIG. 12-5 (B)), it is calculated as 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/100 = 6550 (ms).

In addition, when the ratio of the variation display executed in each case of 0 to 3 in the first special figure reserved storage number is calculated based on the normal state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), FIG. 12-25 (B). ), The ratio of the variable display executed when the number of the first special figure reserved storage is 0 is 10%, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of the first special figure reserved storage is 1. 40%, the ratio of variable display executed when the number of 1st special figure reserved storage is 2 is 40%, and the ratio of variable display executed when the number of 1st special figure reserved storage is 3 is 10. Calculated as%.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is 13340 (ms) × 10/100 +13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 6550 (ms) × 10. It is calculated as / 100 = 12661 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (A), in the time saving state A, the average fluctuation time A in which the fluctuation display result when the number of the second special figure reservation storage is 0 is out of alignment is the second special figure hold. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50,000 (ms) × 5/100 = 9150 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time B at which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of alignment is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-8 (B)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 85/100 + 7000 (ms) × 10/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5750 (ms), and the second The average fluctuation time C at which the variation display result when the number of special figure reserved storages is 2 is out of alignment is based on the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of special figure reserved storages is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns ( (See FIG. 12-8 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5550 (ms), and the second special figure reserved memory number is 3. The average fluctuation time D at which the variation display result in the case of is out of alignment is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (FIG. 12-6 (D)). (See), calculated as 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

It should be noted that, based on the time saving state A shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the second special figure is executed in each case where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the time saving state A is 0 to 3. When the ratio of the fluctuation display to be performed is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (B), the ratio (a and a') of the fluctuation display executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is 0. .9090909%, executed when the ratio of variable display (b and b') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is one is 0.9090909%, and executed when the number of second special figure reservations is two. The ratio of variable display (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the ratio of variable display (d and d') executed when the number of 2nd special figure reservations is 3 is 95.454545%. It is calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') of one fluctuation in the time saving state A is 9150 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) × 0.9090909 / 100 + 5550. It is calculated as (ms) × 2.7272727 / 100 + 5350 (ms) × 95.4545455 / 100 = 5393.636 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (A), in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time E in which the variation display result is out of the case when the second special figure hold storage number is 0 is the second special figure hold. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of storages is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (A)), 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5600 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time F at which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of alignment is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. It is calculated as 1500 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 2205 (ms) from the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-10 (B)), and the second special figure reserved storage number is 2. The average fluctuation time G at which the variation display result in the case of is out of alignment is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (FIG. 12-10 (C)). (Refer to), 1500 (ms) × 99/100 + 25000 (ms) × 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average variation time H in which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 is out of order. Is 1500 (ms) × 100/100 = 1500 (see FIG. 12-10 (D)) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns. ms) is calculated.

It should be noted that, based on the time saving state B shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the second special figure in the variable display of 110 times and 1100 times in the time saving state B is executed in each case of 0 to 3 reserved storage numbers. When the ratio of the variable display to be performed is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (B), the ratio (e and e') of the variable display executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is 0. .9090909%, executed when the ratio of variable display (f and f') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is one is 1.8181818%, and executed when the number of second special figure reservations is two. The ratio of variable display (g and g') to be displayed is 24.54554545%, and the ratio of variable display (h and h') executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 is 72.7272727%. It is calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in the time saving state B is 5600 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) × 1.8181818 / 100 + 1735. It is calculated as (ms) × 24.54554545 / 100 + 1500 (ms) × 72.7272727 / 100 = 1607.773 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (A), in the probabilistic state, the average fluctuation time I in which the fluctuation display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is out of the range is the second special figure reserved storage. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40,000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25,000 × 3/100 = The average fluctuation time J, which is calculated as 8200 (ms) and the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1, is out of the range, is a variation that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. From the pattern and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) × 80/100 + 7000 (ms) × 15/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5000 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time K at which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved number is 2 is out of alignment is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reserved number is 2. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 40,000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25,000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4600 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time L at which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reservation number is 3, is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reservation number is 3. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (D)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4400 (ms).

It should be noted that, based on the probabilistic state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), it is executed in each case where the number of the second special figure reserved storage in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the probable change state is 0 to 3. When the ratio of the variable display is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the ratio of the variable display (i and i') executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is 0.9090909. %, The rate of variation display (j and j') executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is one is 0.9090909%, and it is executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is two. It is calculated that the ratio of variation display (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the ratio of variation display (l and l') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 is 95.4545455%. To.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state is 8200 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) × 0.9090909 / 100 + 4600 ( It is calculated as ms) × 2.7272727 / 100 + 4400 (ms) × 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

From the above, comparing the average fluctuation time of one variation in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variation state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, one variation in the time-saving state B. The average fluctuation time (β and β') of is shorter than the average fluctuation time (α and α') of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A (α> β and α'> β'), and one fluctuation in the time-saving state B. The average fluctuation time (β and β') of is set shorter than the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state (γ> β and γ'> β').

Subsequently, the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time reduction state A, the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time reduction state B, and the variation display of 110 times in the probability variation state are displayed. In the total average fluctuation time when executed, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, and the probability variation state. The total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times is calculated.

As shown in FIGS. 12-30 (A) and 12-35, where the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ, the period value χ is α ( Alternatively, it is calculated as α') × 110 = 5393.633 (ms) × 110 = 593299.63 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ, the period value ψ is β (or β') × 110 = 1607.773 (ms) × 110. It is calculated as = 176855.03 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the probabilistic state is the period value ω, the period value ω is γ (or γ') × 110 = 4445.455 (ms) × 110 =. It is calculated as 489000.05 (ms).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state B by 110 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state A by 110. It is set smaller than the period value ω, and the period value ψ is set smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state by 110 (χ> ψ and). ω> ψ).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (A) and 12-36, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ', the period value χ'. Is calculated as α (or α') × 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) × 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ', the period value ψ'is β (or β') × 1100 = 1607.773 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the probabilistic state is the period value ω', the period value ω'is γ (or γ') × 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 1100 = 489,0000.5 (ms).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, the period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 1100 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110. It is set smaller than the period value ω'to be obtained, and the period value ψ'is set smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state by 110 (. χ'> ψ'and ω'> ψ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state are executed 110 times with each fluctuation and the second special figure reserved storage number is three is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is three. The period value δ is calculated as D × 110 = 5350 (ms) × 110 = 588500 (ms). In addition, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is H × 110 = 1500 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is L × 110 = 4400 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 484000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is a value larger than the period value ε (δ). > Ε, ζ> ε).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation is performed 1100 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure holding storage number is three is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is three. The period value δ'is calculated as D × 1100 = 5350 (ms) × 1100 = 5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is H × 1100 = 1500 (ms). ) X 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is L × 1100 = 4400 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 4840000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value δ'is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ'is a value larger than the period value ε'. (Δ'> ε', ζ'> ε').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 110 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is two is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is two. The period value η is calculated as C × 110 = 5550 (ms) × 110 = 610500 (ms). Further, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is G × 110 = 1735 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is K × 110 = 4600 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 506000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η). > Θ, ι> θ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state are changed every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is two, are compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is two. The period value η'is calculated as C × 1100 = 5550 (ms) × 1100 = 615000 (ms). Further, the period value θ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is G × 1100 = 1735 (ms). ) X 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is K × 1100 = 4600 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 5060000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value η'is a value larger than the period value θ', and the period value ι'is a value larger than the period value θ'. (Η'> θ', ι'> θ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state are executed 110 times with each fluctuation and the second special figure reserved storage number is one is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), it is an average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is one. The period value κ is calculated as B × 110 = 5750 (ms) × 110 = 632500 (ms). Further, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is F × 110 = 2205 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is J × 110 = 5000 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 550000 (ms). That is, in the present feature unit 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ). > Λ, μ> λ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure reserved storage number is one is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is one. The period value κ'is calculated as B × 1100 = 5750 (ms) × 1100 = 6325000 (ms). Further, the period value λ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is F × 1100 = 2205 (ms). ) X 1100 = 2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is J × 1100 = 5000 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 5500000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ'is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ'is a value larger than the period value λ'. (Κ'> λ', μ'> λ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state are executed 110 times every fluctuation and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is 0. The period value ν is calculated as B × 110 = 9150 (ms) × 110 = 1006500 (ms). Further, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is E × 110 = 5600 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is I × 110 = 8200 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 902000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π is a value larger than the period value ξ (ν). > Ξ, π> ξ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0. The period value ν'is calculated as B × 1100 = 9150 (ms) × 1100 = 10065000 (ms). Further, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is E × 1100 = 5600 (ms). ) X 1100 = 616000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are made every fluctuation in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is I × 1100 = 8200 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 9020000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ν'is a value larger than the period value ξ', and the period value π'is a value larger than the period value ξ'. (Ν'> ξ', π'> ξ').

That is, in the feature unit 099SG, when the time required for 110 fluctuation display in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is compared, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the 110 times are compared. The time required for the fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time saving state B (χ> ψ, ω> ψ). Further, comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuation display in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display is also shortened. The state B is set to the lowest (χ'> ψ', ω'> ψ').

Further, in the case of executing 110 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 0, the 110 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (ν> ξ, π> ξ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (ν'> ξ', π'> ξ'). ..

Further, in the case where 110 fluctuations are changed every time in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 1, the 110 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (κ> λ, μ> λ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 1, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (κ'> λ', μ'> λ'). ..

Further, in the case where the variation is executed 110 times in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 2, the 110 times variation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (η> θ, ι> θ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 2, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (η'> θ', ι'> θ'). ..

Further, in the case where 110 fluctuations are changed every time in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 3, the 110 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (δ> ε, ζ> ε). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 3, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (δ'> ε', ζ'> ε'). ..

That is, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state in the feature unit 099SG, when the second special figure holding storage number is 0 and the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure holding is performed. When the number of storages is one and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure is reserved. When the number of storages is two and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure is reserved. The time saving state B is set to have the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (the average fluctuation display time required for each fluctuation is short) in either case where the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times in the state where the number of storages is three. ing. Further, when the player plays the game in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state without worrying about the second special figure reserved memory number (FIGS. 12-26 (B) and 12-27 (B)). , Even when the fluctuation display for each reserved storage number is performed 110 times or 1100 times at the ratio shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (average required for one fluctuation). (Variation display time is short) is set.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG, in addition to the time saving state (time saving state A) and the probabilistic state in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is higher than those in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Since it is possible to control the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, after the end of a big hit, a predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit probability is about 1) without being controlled by the big hit in a low probability state (for example, a normal state (low probability / low base state)). Even when the variable display (about 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) is performed, such as 900 times in the case of / 300, it is not controlled to the time saving state B unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature unit 099SG. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play the game without a jackpot for a long time, and the investment is also large. However, this normal state (low accuracy / low base state) continues until a big hit occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's willingness to play.

On the other hand, in the case where the time saving state B can be controlled like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the main feature unit 099SG, after the big hit ends, the big hit is made in the low probability state (for example, the normal state (low probability / low base state)). When a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) is variablely displayed without being controlled, the time saving state B is controlled, and a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times) is a maximum jackpot. It will be controlled to the time saving state B over the variable display (about 3.8 times the probability denominator, etc.). At this point, the probability of a big hit is already about three times higher, so the player has been playing the game for a long time without a big hit, and the investment is considerably large. However, by being controlled to the time saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a big hit is increased, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suppressed.

In particular, in the feature unit 099SG, the player needs a large amount of time and investment when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B. It functions as a gaming state for relieving the player, in order to shorten the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state by executing the game.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, even if the reserved storage number is fixed and digested in any of the states of 0 to 3, the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency than the time saving state A and the probable change state. Various effects (for example, countdown notice, hold change notice, symbol chance eye notice, effect display notice) described in FIGS. 11-36 (and the drawing in which the feature points according to the feature point 11-36 are described) of the feature unit 069SG. The execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect such as, movable body notice, character notice, reach notice, button notice, etc.) is lower than the execution rate of various effects in the time saving state A and the probable change state (in the feature unit 099SG). The execution ratio of the various effects is the same as the execution ratio of the various effects described in FIGS. 11-36 of the feature unit 069SG). Therefore, even if the player continues to play the game for a long time without a big hit, and even if the investment is high and the player is depressed, when the time saving state B is controlled, the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in any state. Regardless of whether the fluctuation is digested in a fixed state or in a state where the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the fluctuation can be efficiently digested in a state where there is little unnecessary fanning, and thus a suitable time saving state B is provided. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, 12-17, 12-19, and 12-21, the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is multiplied by 110. The calculated values are calculated and compared. This is because the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays (total time of 110 fluctuation displays) out of the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time reduction state B is from the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time reduction state A and the probable change state. Also shows that it is short. If the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is the same (or substantially the same) as the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state, 1100 times of the time-saving state B Since the digestion time of the variable display requires several times the digestion time of 110 variable displays of the time saving state B, if the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, the digestion time is prolonged, which is not suitable for the player. It may give a feeling of pleasure or dissatisfaction. Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from giving a feeling of dissatisfaction when the player is controlled to the time saving state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in the time saving state B more than the time saving state A and the probable change state, and as a result, it is preferable. It is an invention which aims at providing the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can control a gaming state to a time saving state B.

Further, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, 12-18, 12-20, and 12-22, the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is multiplied by 1100. The calculated values are calculated and compared. By controlling the time saving state A and the probabilistic change state multiple times, the variation display in the time saving state A and the probabilistic change state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state B, and these time saving states are executed. By comparing the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the state A, the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the time saving state B, and the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the probabilistic change state, it is shown that the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and the variation display is the player. This is to show that the time saving state B can be suitably controlled so as not to give a feeling of dissatisfaction.

This is performed when the variation display in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state B, by being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state. By designing the time-saving state B to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared with the time-saving state A and the probable change state. Therefore, the fluctuation in the time saving state B is not dissatisfied, and as a result, the time saving state B is preferably controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 110, is the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A. The period value ψ is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of, by 110, and the period value ψ is the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state, multiplied by 110. Since it is set to be smaller than the obtained period value ω, the period until it is controlled to the big hit gaming state is shortened because the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probabilistic changing state. The player's dissatisfaction in the state B can be reduced, and as a result, a suitable time saving state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature unit 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, the period until the game is controlled to the big hit game state can be shortened by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the probability change state, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced. At the same time, in the time saving state A and the probability change state (the time saving state A and the probability change state in which the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the time saving state B and the variation display is likely to be executed) controlled via the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed during the variation display. A predetermined effect suggesting that the state is controlled can be performed over an appropriate period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 1100, is 1 in the time saving state A. It is smaller than the period value χ'obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuations, by 1100, and the period value ψ'is 1100 for the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state. Since it is set to be smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplication, the period until the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A or the probabilistic state and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is set. It is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in the time saving state B by shortening, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B. In particular, in the present feature unit 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, the period until the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state can be shortened by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the probability change state, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced. At the same time, in the time saving state A and the probability change state (the time saving state A and the probability change state in which the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the time saving state B and the variation display is likely to be executed) controlled via the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed during the variation display. A predetermined effect suggesting that the state is controlled can be performed over an appropriate period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time-saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time-saving state A. The period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state A. It is set smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value ξ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the probabilistic state. Since it is set to be smaller than the period value π'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation indications of 1100 times in the time reduction state B, the fluctuation display in the time reduction state B is set to the time reduction state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B. The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one in the time saving state A. The period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is one in the time saving state A. It is set smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value λ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state. Since it is set to be smaller than the period value μ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the variation display in the time saving state B is set to the time saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 2 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the number of display times is 110 times in the time-reduced state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is two in the time-reduced state A. The period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 2 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is two in the time saving state A. The period value θ'is set smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value θ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the probabilistic state. Since the period value ι'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display of 1100 times in the time saving state B is set, the variation display in the time saving state B is set to be smaller than the time saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the number of display times is 110 times in the time-reduced state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time-reduced state A. The period value ε is set to be smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the fluctuation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state A. It is set to be smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value ε'is executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state. Since the period value ζ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display of 1100 times in the time saving state B is set, the variation display in the time saving state B is set to be smaller than the time saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG can execute the variable display of the normal symbol in addition to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit (per ordinary symbol). A game ball can be won at the second starting winning opening that has changed from the closed state to the open state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening, and the game ball has won the second starting winning opening. Based on this, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the information of the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed can be stored as the reserved storage. It has 099SG151B. In both the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B, the maximum number of reserved storage units is set to 4, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved storage units is set according to the gaming state. It doesn't change.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-2 (D), the probability that a normal symbol hit occurs in the variable display of a normal symbol is that the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B. In addition to being common to some cases, the opening time of the second start winning opening when a hit occurs is set to 3 seconds, which is common to both the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the case where the game state is the time saving state B. When the game state is the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the game ball launched by the launcher toward the second path of the right game area wins (enters) the gate 41 or the second start winning opening. ) It is possible. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG, most of the game playability can be shared between the case where the gaming state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B, so that the time saving state A and the time saving state A can be shared. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the large difference in playability between the state B and the state B.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, the variation display period in which the variation display result is out of order is displayed variable from the variation display start timing of the special symbol. The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period until the end timing, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the fluctuation display number of times when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the time saving state B, or the probable change state, "110" or "1100". , But the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period in which the variable display result is out of alignment is the timing at which the game ball is launched, or The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the timing when the launched game ball wins the start winning opening to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the start winning prize, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the game state are in a probable change state. Each period value may be calculated by multiplying "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation display times in either the time saving state B or the probabilistic state. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately obtain the period value in each gaming state by measurement.

Further, the upper limit of the number of hold data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 12-13. In addition, for each period value in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state, the ratio of the fluctuation display executed in each holding storage number to the 110 fluctuation display times is multiplied by the average fluctuation time of each holding storage number. Since it is calculated by the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

In particular, assuming that the game state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α, the period value α is A × a + B × b + C × c + D ×. It is calculated by the value of d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order, b. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of pieces is out of order, c is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 in the time saving state A, and d is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state A. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α in the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the game state is the time saving state B and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, the period value β is E × e + F × f + G × g + H ×. It is calculated by the value of h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order, f. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of individual pieces is out of order, g is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding memories is 3 in the time saving state B, and h is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β in the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the gaming state is the probable change state and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the probable change state is γ, the period value γ is I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. Calculated by value. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i is the case where the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation displays in the probability variation state, J is the average variation time when the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probability variation state, and j is the probability variation state. The ratio of the variation display when the second special figure holding memory is one to the 110 times variation display of the probability variation state, K is the variation display result when the number of the second special figure reservation storage is two in the probability variation state. Is the average fluctuation time that is out of the range, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, and L is the second special figure in the probabilistic state. Figure The average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is 3 and the variable display result is out of order, l is the 2nd special figure in the probabilistic state. It is the ratio to the display. By calculating the period value γ as described above, it is possible to obtain the period value γ in an accurate probability variation state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, the upper limit of the number of hold data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 12-14. In addition, for each period value in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, the ratio of the fluctuation display executed in each holding storage number to the 1100 fluctuation display is multiplied by the average fluctuation time of each holding storage number. Since it is calculated by the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

In particular, if the gaming state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α', the period value α'is A × a'+ B ×. It is calculated by the value of b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order. b'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, c'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state A, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state A. In the time saving state A, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3, and d'is 3 in the time saving state A. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α'as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α'in the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, if the game state is the time saving state B and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β', the period value β'is E × e'+ F ×. It is calculated by the value of f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. f'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, g'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state B, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state B. H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B, and h'is 3 second special figure holding storage in the time saving state B. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β'as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β'in the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the gaming state is the probable change state and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the probable change state is γ', the period value γ'is I × i'+ J × j'. It is calculated by the value of + K × k'+ L × l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i'is when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j'is the probabilistic change. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation when the number of the second special figure holding storage is two in the probabilistic state. The average fluctuation time at which the display result is off, k'is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two 2nd special figure hold memories in the probability change state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability change state, and L is the probability change state. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is three, l'is the variation display when the second special figure reserved storage is three in the probabilistic state, and the variation display is the probabilistic state. It is a ratio to the fluctuation display of 1100 times. By calculating the period value γ'as described above, it is possible to obtain the period value γ'in an accurate probability variation state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

As described above, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state in the feature unit 099SG, when the second special figure is changed 110 times or 1100 times while the number of reserved storages is 0, the second When the number of special figure reservations is 1 and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, when the 2nd special figure reservation number is 2 and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second The time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (the average fluctuation display time required for each fluctuation is short) in either case where the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times with the number of special figure reserved storages being 3. ) It is set. Further, when the player plays the game in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state without worrying about the second special figure reserved memory number (FIGS. 12-26 (B) and 12-27 (B)). , Even when the fluctuation display for each reserved storage number is performed 110 times or 1100 times at the ratio shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (average required for one fluctuation). (Variation display time is short) is set.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state are multiplied by 110 or 1100, respectively. Although the embodiment showing that the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is the highest by comparing the values obtained in the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A is not limited to this. , The value to be multiplied by the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the probability variation state may be a value other than 110 or 1099 such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state B by 109 or 1099 is the time-saving state. This is because the first fluctuation in A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state is almost always started when the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, when the final 5 fluctuations of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, the probable change state, or the time-saving state A and the probable change state are set to the fluctuations having a longer special figure fluctuation time at a higher rate than the other fluctuations. May be a value to be multiplied by 104, 1094, etc. excluding a total of 6 fluctuations of the first fluctuation and the last 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation of feature unit 018SG)
Next, an embodiment in the feature unit 018SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-23. FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 018SG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. In the feature section 018SG, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature sections 069SG and 099SG will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described. Further, the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG and the feature section 099SG.

FIG. 13-1 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 018SG. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach variation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... In addition, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... May be different. Further, although the super reach α and the super reach β are provided as the super reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type as in the normal reach fluctuation putter.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the present embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the fluctuation patterns of the super reach, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β has a variable display period longer (80 seconds) than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach α. .. On the other hand, the variable display period of the super reach γ deviation pattern is shorter than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the super reach α deviation pattern because it is the deviation pattern for high base as described later. It is said to be a period (40 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (low base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the normal state (low base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach). It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot), PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. That is, when the game state is a low base state and the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate is higher in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off" and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the deviation pattern determination table A is used. The fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach out-of-reach), PA2-1 (variation pattern of out-of-reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern of out-of-reach α), and PA2-3 (variation of out-of-reach β). Pattern) and determine. Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected, and the variation pattern determination table B for deviation is used. The fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2-3 (variation of super reach β loss). Pattern) and determine. Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

FIG. 13-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a reduced working hours state (high base state). When the variable display result is "big hit" in the time saving state (high base state), the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach) using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. That is, when the game state is a high base state and the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate is higher in the order of normal reach and super reach γ.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", the deviation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PA1-4 (non-reach deviation pattern) using the deviation pattern determination table D. , PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ deviation). Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4. Assigned.

(About various productions)
Next, various effects performed in the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-3 to 13-5. FIG. 13-3 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. FIG. 13-4 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the out-of-range fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. 13-5 are diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects in FIG. 13-5, and are diagrams for explaining character types in FIGS. 13-5.

Although not particularly shown, the effect control CPU 120 is not shown in particular, but in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach variation pattern, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, and the normal reach effect is performed as the variable display effect (hereinafter referred to as the normal reach effect). , Abbreviated as "N reach production"). After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends without developing into a super reach effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as "SP reach effect").

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the super reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the timing ta0 at which the variable display is started to the elapse of a predetermined period (ta0 to ta1). Then, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 13-9 (N1)). In addition, as the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED208 light emission pattern in this period (ta0 to ta1), in the low base state, the light emission pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of normal background effects, and in the high base state, a plurality of types of music. It is said that the light emission pattern is according to the above, and it is various by combining the light emission pattern according to various SP reach effects with the light emission pattern according to multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns according to multiple types of music. The effect can be enhanced by the light emission pattern.

At the timing ta1 when a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing ta0 when the variable display is started, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, and the "N reach effect" as the variable display effect is executed over the predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode at the timing ta2, and the "SP reach effect" as the variable display effect is executed for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach effect" is a common effect executed in both the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, it ends without developing into the "SP reach effect" and is super. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, it develops into "SP reach production". Therefore, the player can expect to develop into the "SP reach effects A to E" described later by executing the "N reach effect" even in the case of the normal reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, "SP reach effects A to E" indicate whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", that is, "big hit" or "missing". It is an effect of notifying, and in the SP reach effect period, the "decision effect" described later is executed over a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in FIG. 13-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the end of the "SP reach effects A to E", the "post-effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7). After that, the variable display ends. As described above, the variable display based on the super reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach α, β, and γ is the variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It is composed of a post-production part (ta5 to ta7) that informs the expected number of balls that can be obtained in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-4, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variable display ends at the end of "SP reach effects A to E". After the notification of the loss is completed (ta5 to ta5A), the confirmation decoration symbol of the predetermined reach combination that is not the big hit combination is temporarily stopped and returned to the normal background screen (shaking state), and the symbol confirmation period is reached. Temporary stop is displayed until it becomes.

Next, various effects executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach α fluctuation pattern, “SP reach effect A” is executed as the SP reach effect, and when the variation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern. When "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect. Is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in the "SP reach effects B to E" other than the "SP reach effect A", the ally character A different from the ally character A-1 and the ally character A-1. -2, an enemy character X-1, and an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 can appear. The number of types of ally characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and ally characters and enemy characters other than the above may appear. Further, even if the characters are the same, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the display mode.

"SP reach effect A" is an effect that is executed when the SP reach α fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and a moving image for performing a bowling challenge is displayed. When all the pins fall, the "big hit" is notified, and when all the pins do not fall, the "missing" is notified. In the moving image of the bowling challenge, the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed.

"SP reach effect B" can be executed when the SP reach β fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 Is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle A" that confronts in the city, and when the ally character A-1 defeats the enemy character X-1 and wins, the "big hit" is notified and the ally character A-1 Is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1, and the "missing" is notified.

"SP reach effect C" can be executed when the SP reach β fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 Is a production in which a moving image of "Battle A" confronting in the city is displayed, and when the ally character A-2 defeats the enemy character X-2 and wins, the "big hit" is notified and the ally character A-2. Is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2, and the "missing" is notified.

"SP reach effect D" is enabled when the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B (high base state), and is enabled for allies. It is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-1 confront each other in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, " "Big hit" is notified, and "missing" is notified when the ally character A-1 is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1.

"SP reach effect E" can be executed when the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B (high base state), and the ally. It is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-2 confront each other in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, " "Big hit" is notified, and "missing" is notified when the ally character A-1 is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2.

Since the fluctuation pattern of super reach β has a higher expectation of big hit than the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, the expectation of big hit is higher in SP reach production B and SP reach production C than in SP reach production A ( Big hit expectation: SP reach production A <SP reach production B <SP reach production C).

The "decision effect" is a predetermined period (for example, timing ta3 at which the final confrontation of bowling or battle starts just before the end of the SP reach effect) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the SP reach effects A to E. , Ta3 to ta5). Specifically, during the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the push button 31B, the "hit / miss button effect" for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B and the operation of the push button 31B are detected during the operation valid period. It includes a "movable body effect" that is executed at the timing when the operation is performed or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit, and the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or the operation valid period without detecting the operation of the push button 31B. This is an effect in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the above is completed. If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is not executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation valid period ends.

Further, according to the execution of the movable body effect (falling of the movable body 32), the effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body LED 208 and the game effect are displayed. A light emission effect that lights the lamp 9 or the like with a predetermined light emission color (for example, rainbow color lighting), and a vibration that drives the vibration motor 61 for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. A production and a sound production that outputs a predetermined sound effect are performed.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, the ally character and the enemy character are not displayed in the boring confrontation, so that the character is not displayed in the movable body effect, while in the SP reach effect B to E, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the battle confrontation. By displaying, the enemy character that was displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed even in the movable body production.

In this way, in the "decision effect", when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit notification is performed by executing the movable body effect after the hit / fail button effect is performed, and the variable display result is out of order. In some cases, after the hit / fail button effect is performed, the missed notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

The "post-effect A" is executed after being notified that the SP reach effects A to C are controlled to the big hit game state when the variable display result is a big hit in the normal state (low base state) of the game state. To. Specifically, in the SP reach effects A to C, after the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the jackpot confirmation notification is performed. The re-variable display was executed in the re-lottery variable part (ta5 to ta6) in which the re-variable display of the confirmed decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed, and in the re-lottery variable part. It is composed of a re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in which the display result is notified when the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed later in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production A is set to "10 seconds".

In the present embodiment, in the SP reach effects A to C, a definite decorative symbol composed of a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revariable display is started in the re-lottery variable part. After that, in the re-lottery result part, the definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of even-numbered symbols or the definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. When the confirmed decorative symbol consisting of a combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed in the re-lottery result part, it is notified that the "big hit A" is controlled to the time saving state A after the end of the jackpot game state, and the odd symbols are displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol consisting of the combination is stopped and displayed (symbol promotion), it is notified that the "big hit B" is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the post-effect A of the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, so that the character does not appear in the post-effect A either. Further, in the post-effect A of the SP reach effects B and C, the character appears in the SP reach effects B and C, but the character does not appear in the post-effect A. By doing so, even when the SP reach effect A in which the character does not appear is executed, the post-effect A is executed in a manner in which the character does not appear, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The "post-effect B" is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the SP reach effects D and E when the variable display result is a jackpot in the game state A, the probability change state, and the time reduction state B (high base state). It is executed after being notified. Specifically, in the SP reach effects D and E, after the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Scheduled ball ejection addition parts (ta5 to ta6) in which the planned number of balls to be ejected is additionally displayed according to the ally characters appearing in the SP reach effects D and E attacking the enemy character, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. After giving the last blow, the scheduled number of balls to be released is stopped and displayed, and after the planned number of balls to be released is notified, the fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. It is composed of ta6 to ta7). The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B is set to "15 seconds", which is longer than the execution period of the post-effect A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach α is 45 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach β. Is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. That is, the variable display part period is shortened in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β> SP reach α> SP reach γ). ..

Further, the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of the variable display in the SP reach α, β, and γ to the N reach is different, and the period from the start of the variable display in the SP reach γ to the N reach. The period (ta0 to ta1) is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display to N reach in SP reach α and β (ta0 to ta1; SP reach γ <SP reach α, β).

Further, the execution periods (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach α, β, and γ are different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach γ is N in the SP reach α and β. It is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the reach effect (ta1 to ta2; SP reach γ <SP reach α, β).

Further, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach effects A to E in the SP reach α, β, and γ are different, and the SP reach γ (SP reach effects D and E) and the SP reach α (SP reach effects A) are different. , SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C) becomes longer in this order {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effect D, E) <SP reach α (SP reach effect A) <SP reach β (SP) Reach production B, C)}.

Further, while the variable display part period (40 seconds) of SP reach γ is shorter than the variable display part period (45 seconds) of SP reach α and the variable display part period (80 seconds) of SP reach β (variable display period). SP reach β> SP reach α> SP reach γ), SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E) After the decision effect is completed, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R has a predetermined jackpot combination. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B until the finalized decorative symbol is stopped is determined by the SP reach α (SP reach effect A) and the SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C). It is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production A from the end to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5 to ta7). ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds)> SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

Further, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B =. SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E). Therefore, since the control data of the movable body 32 and the movable body LED 208 in the SP reach effects A to E can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It should be noted that the execution period of the "win / fail button effect" in the "decision effect" and the execution period of the "movable body effect" are also common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Further, the execution period of the "post-effects A and B" in the SP reach α, β, and γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the SP reach effect A. From the timing ta5 when the fixed decoration symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of ~ E, the fixed decoration symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends). ) By setting the timing to ta7 (ta5 to ta7), it becomes easier to recognize the timing at which the ex-post effect is executed, and at the same time, the form in which the attention to the ex-post effects A and B can be increased is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and "post-production A, B" in the symbol confirmation period or the fanfare period of the jackpot, which is started after the fixed decoration symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. May be feasible.

Further, the variable display period of the SP reach γ for the high base is shorter than the variable display period of the SP reach β for the low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ <SP reach β), and the “movable body” in the SP reach γ. The period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "effect" ends to the timing ta7 (ta4 to ta7) when the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed, is the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach β. It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ> SP reach β) until the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. By doing so, in the SP reach γ executed in a short variable display period, the period after the end of the “movable body effect” is lengthened to enhance the impression of the variable display even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

Further, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (post-effect B) corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is common. ta5 to ta7) are all common. By doing so, the control data of the post-effects A and B, particularly the post-effects B, can easily divert the motion control data of the character, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (post-effect B) corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is the same. While ta5 to ta7) are all common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" and the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-effect B" are different, so that each of SP reach effects A to C By making the production period of the post-production A corresponding to the above common, it is possible to easily standardize the production content and control, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and by executing the post-production B with a different production period. , It is possible to prevent the post-production A and B from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the post-production.

(Operation modes of SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B)
Next, the operation modes of the SP reach effects A to E and the post-effects A and B when the variable display result is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-6. 13-6 are diagrams showing the display mode of the character in the SP reach effects A to E, (B) showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E, and (C) showing the SP reach. It is a figure which shows the output pattern of the BGM and the sound effect in the production A to E.

As shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A), the display mode of the characters in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. In the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the boring confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effect A In the SP reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. In the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. As described above, the SP reach effect A is an effect in which the character is not displayed, whereas the SP reach effects B to E are effects in which the character is displayed.

Further, in the execution period of the "hit / fail button effect" of the determined effect in the SP reach effect, the character is not displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while in the execution period of the "movable body effect", the SP reach effect A , The character is not displayed, in the SP reach effect B, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed. In the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed.

Further, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP reach effect, the character is not displayed in the SP reach effect A, and in the SP reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed. In the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the SP reach effect is displayed. In E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

Further, in the re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) and the re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect A corresponding to the SP reach effects A to C, the character is not displayed in the SP reach effect A, and the SP In the reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

Further, in the scheduled launch addition part (ta5 to ta6) and the scheduled launch notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effects D and E, in the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 And the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In this way, in the SP reach effect A, the character is not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so that the character is not displayed in the movable body effect or the post-effect A, while in the SP reach effect B to E, the character is confronted with the ally character in the battle confrontation. The enemy character is also displayed in the movable body effect and the post effect A and B.

That is, in the SP reach effect A, the image of the mode related to the boring confrontation (the image in which the character is not displayed) is displayed in the movable body effect before the big hit confirmation notification is performed, and in the SP reach effects B to E, the big hit. In the movable body effect before the definite notification is performed, the image of the aspect related to the battle confrontation (the image of the enemy character that was opposed) is displayed, so that the SP reach effects A to E and the SP reach effect A are displayed. It is possible to enhance the relationship with the movable body effect performed during the effect period of ~ E.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, an image of an aspect related to the SP reach effect A (an image in which the character is not displayed) is displayed in the post-effect A, and in the SP reach effects D and E, the SP reach is displayed in the post-effect B. Since the images of the modes related to the effects D and E (images of the friendly character and the enemy character that were opposed to each other) are displayed, the SP reach effects A, D, and E and the end of the SP reach effects A, D, and E. It is possible to enhance the relevance of the post-effects A and B to be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LEDs 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. The numerical values in parentheses (for example, B100, etc.) of each pattern indicate the extended commands described in the feature unit 069SG. Further, the various light emission patterns described below differ from other light emission patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as emission color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting time, extinguishing timing, extinguishing time, and blinking cycle. Each emission pattern can be changed in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, the SP reach production A is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-1 based on the extended command B100, and the SP reach productions B and C are lit with the extended command. It is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-2 based on B101, and is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-3 based on the extended command B102 in the SP reach effects D and E.

Further, during the execution period of the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, the light emission pattern LP2-1 to 4 common to the SP reach effects A to E is lit based on the extended commands B200 to B203. .. As for the emission patterns LP2-2 to 4, one of them is selected based on the variable display result, and the expectation is higher in the order of emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, LP2-4. ing.

Further, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit by the common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B000. Further, during the execution period of the "missing notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit by the common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B300.

Further, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball ejection addition part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effects A to C are lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-1 based on the extended command BA00. Then, in the SP reach effects D and E, the lights are turned on by the common light emission pattern LP4-4 based on the extended command BB00.

Further, in the re-lottery result part in the post-effect A and the scheduled launch notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effects A to C are lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-2 based on the extended command BA01. Or, it is lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-3 based on the extended command BA02, and in the SP reach effects D and E, it is lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB01, or it is turned on by the extended command BB02. Based on this, it is lit with a common light emission pattern LP4-6.

The emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different emission modes based on the emission control data described later. The outline of each light emission pattern will be described below. The extended command is shown in parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A), in the "boring / battle", the light emitting pattern LP1-1 (B100) has a frame LED (frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1) according to the introduction of the reach title and the moving image of the boring confrontation. ~ 9R12) and the on-board LED (movable body LED208) emit light (see FIG. 13-10), and the light emission pattern LP1-2 (B101) introduces a reach title and emits light based on the color of the city background. The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in color, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface also emit light according to the actions (attack action, etc.) of the ally A-1 / A-2 and the enemy X-1 / X-2. It is a light emitting pattern (see FIGS. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and the light emitting pattern LP1-3 (B102) is a frame LED and a game board surface with a light emitting color based on the introduction of the title and the color of the wilderness background. This is a pattern in which the upper LED emits light, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the actions (attack operation, etc.) of the ally A-1 and the enemy X-1 / X-2 (FIG. 13-12 (FIG. 13-12). See A4) and (A5)).

In the "hit / fail button effect", the light emission pattern LP2-1 (B200) is the default white frame LED after the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in accordance with "hold down the button to accumulate power!". And the pattern that the LED on the game board surface emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for power-up (first stage) at the time of button operation, and the frame LED and the game are in "blue". It is a pattern that the LED on the board emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for power-up (second stage) at the time of button operation, and is "green" on the frame LED and the game board surface. The LED emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power-up (third stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in "red". It is a pattern (see FIG. 13-13). It should be noted that the light emission patterns LP2-2 to 4 are light emission patterns that gradually change to blue, green, and red (MAX) according to the player's long press operation (how much the gauge display is accumulated).

In the "missing notification", when the light emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is notified of the "missing" in the result notification, the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in white with low brightness, and the display screen is a normal background. It is a pattern that continues until the next fluctuation is started even if the LED returns to (see FIG. 13-16).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the light emitting pattern LP3-2 (B000) is used as the background for the movable body effect (first period) when the "big hit" is notified in the result notification. In the movable body production (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light according to the background image and the effect display at the time of the movable body production, and the frame LED and the game are displayed in rainbow colors in the jackpot notification. It is a pattern in which the LED on the board emits light (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15). The extended command (B000) is different from other extended commands in that it operates the movable body 32, so that the operation control data (sets the number of steps, the speed, and the time related to the motor drive), the frame LED, and the LED on the game board surface are used. Both the gradation control data for emitting light and the gradation control data are set.

Further, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body operation control and the LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extended command for the movable body operation control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. The control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended command used for the movable body effect is divided into the extended command for moving body operation control and the extended command for LED lighting control, one of the extended commands may be missed due to a defect, but it is common. This makes it possible to suitably produce a movable body.

In addition, by performing movable body operation control and LED lighting control with one extended command without separating the extended command between "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", it is not necessary to divide the extended command according to the effect. Therefore, the program capacity of the production control can be reduced. If the extended command is divided into "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", there is a risk that one of the extended commands will be missed due to a defect, but by sharing it, "movable body effect" and "big hit" are suitable. "Notification" can be performed.

In the "re-lottery variation / scheduled ball ejection addition", the light emission pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the moving image (round and round) of the background (FIG. 13-17). (Refer to F1)), the light emission pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a light emission color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the KED on the game board surface emit light, and the action of the ally A-1 (attack action, etc.) ), The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light (see FIGS. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result / scheduled launch notification", the light emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) emits light from the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface when the combination of even symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed. It is a pattern (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), and the light emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is brighter than the light emitting pattern LP4-2 when the combination of odd symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed. It is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light at a higher gradation cycle speed (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the light emission pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled launch notification "750". , The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in accordance with the display of "750", and the same gradation control data as "1500" is used until "750" is displayed (FIG. 13-19). (Refer to (G1-3) to (G3)), the light emitting pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the scheduled launch notification "1500", and is more than when "750" is displayed according to the display of "1500". It is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light at high brightness and the gradation cycle is fast, and the gradation control data common to "750" is used until "1500" is displayed (FIG. 13-19 (FIG. 13-19). See G1-4) to (G4)).

Further, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation notification as the post-period effect in the later period after the movable body effect during the execution of the SP reach effects A to E, and the jackpot confirmation notification depends on the type of the SP reach effects A to E. However, since the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable LED 208 are common (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2), the common light emission pattern is used regardless of the types of SP reach effects A to E. Since the jackpot confirmation notification is executed, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The light emission pattern may be different depending on the types of SP reach effects A to E. For example, the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effect A is set to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 13-21, and is used for the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects B and C. The corresponding light emission pattern LP3-2 is a rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow light emission) shown in FIG. 13-22, and the light emission pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects D and E is shown in FIG. 13-. The rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow emission) shown in 22 may be changed to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 13-21.

Further, the light emission patterns of the movable body LEDs 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball ejection addition part of the post-production B are common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4). As a result, the light emission pattern can be made common, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

Further, the light emission patterns of the movable body LEDs 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) in the scheduled launch notification part of the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E. On the other hand, the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 of the post-effect A corresponding to the SP reach effect A and the SP reach effect D The manufacturing cost is further reduced by being different from the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LEDs 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effect E. The reduction can be achieved, and the effect of the ex-post effect can be enhanced by executing the post-effect A having a different light emission pattern.

In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is an arbitrary timing in which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period is not detected without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is exemplified by the common light emission pattern LP3-2, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in different light emission patterns according to the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the light emitting mode by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the hobby of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), regarding the LED light emission pattern in the SP reach effect, the light emission pattern LP1-2 is commonly used in the SP reach effects B and C. For example, the SP reach effect B is used. The light emission pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of the enemy character X-1, light emission according to the action) is used, and the light emission pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background) is used for SP reach C. By using color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to action), the brightness data of a part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP reach effects B and C is used in common. While suppressing the development cost, the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 may each use dedicated luminance data to make a difference in the appearance at the minimum cost.

The emission pattern LP1-3 is commonly used in the SP reach effects D and E. For example, in the SP reach effect D, the emission pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + image color of the enemy character X-1). , Light emission according to the action), and SP Reach E uses the light emission pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wilderness background color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to the action). While reducing the development cost by using the brightness data of a part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP reach effects D and E in common, the part related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 has their own brightness. Data may be used to make a difference in presentation at the lowest cost.

Further, one of the SP reach effects B and C in the low base state and the SP reach effects D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach effects D and E) is set as a common light emission pattern, and the other (for example, SP) is used. Reach effects B and C) may be different emission patterns. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost on the one hand and to show the difference in the production on the other hand.

(Gradation control data)
Here, the control data for realizing the light emission effect will be briefly described. FIG. 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED with a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. FIG. 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in the lighting pattern of the flash rainbow emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 40 msec. .. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in a rainbow color by performing lamp control based on the smooth rainbow light emission data table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-22, as the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, the luminance data corresponding to the extinguishing of 20 msec corresponds to the seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. It is specified between data of various brightness. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the flash rainbow light emission data table to violently turn on the frame lamp in the rainbow color.

The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table includes, for example, a light emission pattern (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), a driver ID, an output terminal number, and electrical components. And the data for generating the light emission control are defined in association with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emitting pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitting body driver, and the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitting body driver output terminal. The light emitter driver and the electric components corresponding to the output terminal numbers (for example, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, movable body LED208, etc.) are stored in the light emitting body driver, and the light emitting body driver is stored in the light emission control generation data. The data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the above, and the data used for generating the light emission control data based on the control data format is stored.

Each emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit emission time, a emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table is stored in the data name, and the format type includes the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1). Identification information (“basic” or “extended”) to which format is applied is stored, and the address set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the illuminant driver is stored in the address, and data transmission is performed. The cycle stores the cycle of transmitting the light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitting body driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emitting time is the unit time of causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitting body driver to emit light. It will be remembered. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle will be described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

In the light emission control cycle, a time (hereinafter, this cycle is referred to as “light emission control cycle”), which is a control unit for light emission for one cycle, is stored. This light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100ms" can be set, and the emission type is "switching" (special emission color due to change of multiple colors (special emission color due to change of multiple colors). In the case of rainbow-colored light emission, etc.), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

In the format data, time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type is stored. Specifically, in the format data, the light emission order and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, it will be described that the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 is controlled by the Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In the color hexadecimal number, "16 x 16 = 256 gradations" is expressed by expressing each of RGB by a total of 6 hexadecimal digits (0 to F) by 2 digits, but in the present specification, 2 digits of each of RGB are expressed. It is illustrated and explained as a notation in which the numerical values of are the same value and each of RGB is abbreviated to a total of 3 digits, one digit each. Further, for the sake of simplicity, the notation of "0x" representing a hexadecimal number is omitted and illustrated and described.

Further, the Q data includes Q data for group 1 and Q data for group 2 as Q data to be output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. Q data for 3 is included. In the Q data corresponding to each group, RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group are stored.

This will be described in detail. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is defined that the effect control board 12 transmits data to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Further, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is defined that the target LED emits light in a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Further, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control cycle in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color. There is.

Further, for example, in the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "N", and the Q data (RGB value) of each group is defined for each of the light emission orders "1" to "N". If "0, 0, F" is defined as, the R value and G value in the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all emission orders. Continuous blue emission is realized.

Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to realize light emission by color mixing will be described. The Q data (RGB value) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the above-mentioned emission control generation data.

FIG. 13-22 shows gradation control data which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow-colored blinking (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated. Since the gradation control data of the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is targeted for the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, the illustration is omitted. In this gradation control data, the switching unit emission time Δtn is shown in the left column, and each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (group 1 (9L1)) is shown in the right column. The Q data (RGB value) corresponding to 9L4), ...) Is expressed in hexadecimal.

Further, in the emission order 2 of the gradation control data shown in FIGS. 13-22, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of the groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) are “0, 0, By setting "0", the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

Further, in the emission order 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIGS. 13-22, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 30 ms, the Q data (RGB values) of the groups 1 and 2 are “0, 4, F”, and the group 3. Q data (RGB value) is "0, 8, F", Q data (RGB value) of group 4 is "0, C, F", and Q data (RGB value) of group 5 is "0, F, D". , The Q data (RGB value) of group 6 is "0, F, 9", the Q data (RGB value) of group 7 is "0, F, 5", and the Q data (RGB value) of group 8 is "0". , F, 1 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 9 is“ 2, F, 0 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 10 is“ 6, F, 0 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 11. ) Is "A, F, 0" and the Q data (RGB values) of the group 12 is "F, F, 0". ) Is realized.

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to emit light in a plurality of colors in order with a short switching unit emission time Δts, and by sandwiching the control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, human beings. It can be visually recognized as if it is blinking in rainbow colors. The mode sandwiched between them is not limited to extinguishing, and may be, for example, white that does not constitute rainbow color. In the case of emitting light in white, "1. An RGB value with low brightness such as "1, 1" may be set.

FIG. 13-21 shows the gradation control data which is the control data for performing the gradation control for realizing the rainbow-colored lighting (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.) in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated.

In the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, unlike the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, the control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 is not sandwiched between them. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if it is lit in rainbow colors by humans. In the emission order 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the emission of the same emission color as the emission order 2 of the gradation control data is realized. In addition, even in the gradation control data, by controlling the emission colors to be emitted from the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 in order with a short switching unit emission time Δts, the emission colors are lit in rainbow colors visually by humans. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (C), the output patterns of BGM and sound effects in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. Further, in the various sound patterns described below, at least one of a plurality of elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music is different from the other sound patterns, and each sound pattern is changed variously. It is possible.

In the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the boring confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, the BGM and the sound effect are output in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach production A, and the sound pattern BP1- in the SP reach production B. BGM and sound effects are output in 2, in SP reach effect C, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-3, and in SP reach effect D, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-4. In the SP reach effect E, the BGM and the sound effect are output in the sound pattern BP1-5.

Further, during the execution period of the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, the sound patterns BP2-1 to 4 common to the SP reach effects A to E are output. As for the sound patterns BP2-2 to 4, one of them is selected based on the variable display result, and the expectation is higher in the order of the sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4. ing.

Further, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification" in the SP reach effect, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3 in the SP reach effects A to E. Further, during the execution period of the "missing notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit with the common sound patterns BP3-1 to 3.

Further, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball ejection addition part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-production B, the SP reach productions A to C are output by the sound pattern BP4-1, and the SP reach production D, In E, BGM and sound effects are output by the sound pattern BP4-4.

Further, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball ejection notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach productions A to C, the sound pattern BP4-2 or the sound pattern BP4-3 is used. BGM and sound effects are output, and in SP reach effects D and E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP4-5 or the sound pattern BP4-6.

The sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 output sounds in different modes based on the sound control data, respectively. It is said that the pattern is to be made, and the outline of each sound pattern will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (B), in "bowling / battle", the sound pattern BP1-1 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production A, the voice of "defeat the pin!", And the SP reach. It is a pattern in which the BGM of the production A is output (see FIG. 13-10), and the sound pattern BP1-2 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for the SP reach production B, the voice of "Fight!" It is a pattern in which the voice of the ally A-1, the BGM of the SP reach effect B, and the battle effect sound are output (see Fig. 13-11 (A2)), and the sound pattern BP1-3 is the SP reach effect C. It is a pattern that outputs the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for, the voice of "Fight!", The voice of the ally A-2 of "Next is settled!", The BGM of SP reach production C, and the battle sound (Fig.). 13-11 (see A3)), the sound pattern BP1-4 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production D, the voice of "Fight!", And the voice of ally A-1 of "Next is settled!" , BGM of SP reach effect D, a pattern in which a battle effect sound is output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and the sound pattern BP1-5 is a voice at the time of introduction of the reach title for SP reach effect E, " This is a pattern in which the voice of "Fight!", The voice of ally A-1 of "Next is settled!", The BGM of SP reach production E, and the battle sound are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

In the "hit / fail button effect", the sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which the voice of "hold down the button to accumulate power" and the sound effect of power level 0 are output (see FIG. 13-13). The sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the power level 1 is output, the sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the power level 2 is output, and the sound pattern BP2-4 is the power. This is a pattern in which a level 3 (MAX) voice and a power level 3 (MAX) sound effect are output.

In the "missing notification", the sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the failure is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H1)), and the sound pattern BP3-2 is the defeat of the ally A-1 (sorry). ) Voice and battle defeat BGM is output (see Fig. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is the defeat (sorry) voice and battle of ally A-2. This is a pattern in which the defeated BGM is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "movable body effect & jackpot notification", the sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the sound effect of success, and the BGM of success are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E1)). The sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the winning voice of the ally A-1, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIGS. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)). The sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the winning voice of the ally A-2, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E3)).

In the "re-lottery variation / scheduled ball addition", the sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the BGM of the re-lottery variation is output (see FIG. 13-17 (F1)), and the sound pattern BP4-4 is scheduled. This is a pattern in which the BGM of the ball ejection addition, the sound effect (attack) of the scheduled ball ejection addition, the voice for the scheduled ball ejection addition of the ally A-1, and the voice of "press!" Are output (see FIG. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result / scheduled launch notification", the sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of even-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (FIG. 13-17 (F2), sound pattern BP4). -3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of odd-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the sound pattern BP4-5 is the BGM of the scheduled launch notification, 750. It is a pattern in which sound effects are output (see FIGS. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and the sound pattern BP4-6 outputs the sound effects of BGM and 1500 of the scheduled launch notification and the voice of MAX. It is a pattern to be performed (see FIGS. 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

Further, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to all types of SP reach effects A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to 3), so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is an arbitrary timing in which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period is not detected without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect exemplifies the common sound pattern BP2-1 to 4, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the sound effect may be output in a different sound pattern according to the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / miss button effect" is executed. By doing so, the sound effect can be changed by different timings operated by the player, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(Flow of SP reach production A to E)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the SP reach α, β, and γ, when the SP reach effect is developed from the N reach effect, in the case of the SP reach effect A, boring as shown in (A1). The start image of the battle A between the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2) in the case of the SP reach effect B, and in the case of the SP reach effect C. Displays the start image of the battle A between the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 as shown in (A3), and in the case of the SP reach effect D, the ally character A- as shown in (A4). The start image of the battle B between 1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the start of the battle B between the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 as shown in (A5). The image is displayed. As described above, the first half of the SP reach effects A to E is different for each of the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, the hit / fail button effect is started at a predetermined timing at the end of the SP reach effect. Specifically, as shown in (B1), after the first operation promotion effect for promoting the long press operation of the push button 31B is started, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation promotion effect was started. At the timing, as shown in (B2), the second operation promotion effect for promoting the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is started. As described above, the effect mode in the pass / fail button effect is common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the hit / fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the operation valid period elapses without doing so, as shown in (C), an image showing the last throw in bowling and the last blow in battle is displayed.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the ball hits the pin is displayed, and the SP reach effect B is displayed. In the case of (D2), as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of SP reach effect C, , (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of the SP reach effect D, (D4). ), The movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of the SP reach effect E, it is shown in (D5). As described above, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. As described above, the effect mode of the movable body effect is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effects B and D, and the SP reach effects C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed as shown in (E1), and in the case of the SP reach effect B, the battle A is displayed as shown in (E2). A result image showing that the player has won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect C, a result image indicating that the battle A has been won is displayed as shown in (E3). In the case of the SP reach effect D, ( As shown in E4), a result image showing that the battle B has been won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, a result image showing that the battle A has been won is displayed as shown in (E5). To. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different for each of the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effects A to C, the post-effect A is started, and in the re-lottery variation part shown in (F1), the image in which the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in (E1 to E3) is revariably displayed is displayed. After being displayed, in the re-lottery result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect D, the post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball ejection addition part shown in (G1), the ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacks the enemy character X-1. Then, the image to which the scheduled ball is added is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball addition part shown in (G2), the ally displayed in (A5). An image is displayed in which the character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2 and the scheduled launch ball is added. Next, in the case of the SP reach effects D and E, the scheduled number of balls to be released is displayed in the scheduled ball ejection notification part shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the pass / fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. The image shown in (C) (D1 to D5) is not displayed at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in (H1), the strike failed. The result image shown is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect B, as shown in (H2), the result image indicating that the player has been defeated in battle A is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect C, it is shown in (H3). As shown in (H4), a result image indicating that the player has been defeated in Battle A is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect D, a result image indicating that the player has been defeated in Battle B is displayed. In the case of E, as shown in (H5), a result image showing that the battle A has been defeated is displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effects B and D, and the SP reach effects C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effects A to E, as shown in (I1), a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is stopped and displayed.

(Example of production operation of SP reach production A to E)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the SP reach effects A to E executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-9 to 13-20. FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation from the start of variable display of SP reach α, β, and γ to the development of SP reach effect. FIG. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the SP reach effect A. FIG. 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of effect operation of SP reach effects B and C. 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the SP reach effects D and E. FIG. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the pass / fail button effect. FIG. 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of a movable body effect effect. FIG. 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the jackpot notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the missed notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 13-17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the ex post facto effect A. FIG. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the ex post facto effect B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the ex post facto effect B.

In the following description, the effect operations commonly executed among the SP reach effects A to E will be collectively described, and the different effect operations will be described individually. Further, it is assumed that a part of the numbers (for example, A to I) assigned to each frame corresponds to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in FIGS. 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R is based on the fact that any of SP reach α, β, and γ is determined as the fluctuation pattern with the occurrence of the starting prize. In, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In the following, the active display area 018SG003 corresponding to the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 018SG013 corresponding to the active display area 069SG013 of the feature unit 069SG, and the first hold display area corresponding to the first hold display area 069SG011 is displayed. The hold display 018SG001 corresponding to the hold display 069SG001 is displayed in the 018SG011, and the hold display 018SG002 corresponding to the hold display 069SG002 is displayed in the second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to the second hold display area 069SG012. do.

After the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C and the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach mode was established. After the decorative symbols having different numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is restarted as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), which leads to the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach effect A is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A indicating that A is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect A) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and a content display indicating bowling. 018 SG102 and.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 showing that the pins are lined up in the bowling lane and the challenge is started is displayed and is shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2). As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-3), after the image 018SG104 in which the ball hits the pin and is knocked down is displayed, an image in which one pin remains in the bowling lane and "one remaining". The image 018SG105 is displayed, which has the characters "!" And indicates that the next throw is the last throw. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1. BGM is output.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach effect B is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01B indicating that B is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01B has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect B) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), there are a background image 018SG201 showing the city, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1. Then, the image 018SG202 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2), the image 018SG203 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach effect C is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01C indicating that C is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01C has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect C) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-2. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), there are a background image 018SG201 showing the city, a character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2. Then, the image 018SG212 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2), the image 018SG213 in which the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 having a character image 018SGA2 and a character image 018SGX2 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach effect D is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01D indicating that D is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01D has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect D) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), there are a background image 018SG221 showing the wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1. Then, the image 018SG222 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2), the image 018SG223 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach effect E is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01E indicating that E is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01E has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect E) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), there are a background image 018SG221 showing the wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2. Then, the image 018SG232 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), the image 018SG233 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX2 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the pass / fail button effect is started, the button image 018SG241 imitating the push button 31B and, for example, "Keep pressing the button to accumulate power!" Operation promotion display 018SG242 and the like are displayed, and an operation promotion effect for promoting a long press operation of the push button 31B is started. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "charge start!", The gauge display 018SG243 indicating the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and a long press operation is performed. Is detected, the display modes of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 change. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission patterns LP2-2 to 4, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound patterns BP2-2 to 4. Voice and BGM are output from 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when the long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Power MAX!". To. Even if the long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 may not be set to MAX according to the variable display result. Further, the change mode of the power level may be different depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pass / fail button effect, the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Release!" As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), and the push button is displayed to the player. The long press operation of 31B is urged to be released, and the gauge display 018SG243 is switched and displayed on the gauge indicating the remaining operation valid period. Further, the effect operations of FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3) are common to the SP reach effects A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-2), an operation promotion display for accumulating power is executed in the pass / fail button effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion display may not be executed.

Then, it is variable when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in the hit / fail button effect, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B. When the display result is a big hit, the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 is started.

In the first period from the start of the movable body effect to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position. The attack image 018SG250 showing the last throw and the last blow is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 includes an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operation portion of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows that the object is moving to the back side of the screen. Further, according to the movement from the origin position of the movable body 32 to the effect position, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are colored according to the background as the light emission effect based on the light emission pattern LP3-2. It lights up, and as a sound effect, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates by the vibration motor 61.

As described above, in the first period of the movable body effect, the effect of the common mode is executed in the SP reach effects A to E, but in the second period after the first period ends, as follows. SP reach effects A to E perform different types of effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A and the effect image 018SG250B showing the impact are displayed. The impact image 018SG251 that the object hits something is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 exemplifies a mode in which the collided object (for example, a pin) with which an object (ball) collides is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the impact image is not limited to this. An image showing a boring pin may be displayed on the 018SG251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2) (D4), in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position and the object image. It has 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 showing an enemy character X1, and an impact image 018SG252 showing that an attack hits an enemy character X-1 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D3) and 13-14 (D5), in the case of the SP reach effect C and the SP reach effect E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position and the object image. It has 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 showing an enemy character X2, and an impact image 018SG253 showing that the attack hits the enemy character X-2 is displayed.

Further, in the second period of the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), a common display effect, light emission effect, sound effect, and vibration effect are performed. Specifically, the effect image 018SG250B is alternately displayed and hidden according to the vibration of the movable body 32 (displayed when the movable body 32 moves upward, displayed when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.), and emits light. As a result, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 basically match the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and the orange and red colors are from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LED 9L1. It emits light with a light emission pattern that flows outward in the order of 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12, and also emits light with a light emission pattern that flashes violently in white when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed. Based on 3 to 3, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the push button 31B vibrates by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect. In addition, in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), the display using the light guide plate display device or the like may be performed.

In FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 has a display common to or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time. It is displayed in color (for example, similar colors). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 showing the enemy character and the effect image 018SG250B can be enhanced, so that the effect of producing the movable body can be enhanced.

Then, after the movable body production is completed, as shown in FIGS. 13-15, it is notified that a big hit will occur. Specifically, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a character display 018SG262 indicating "success!", And an effect image 018SG263. The result image 018SG260A showing that the bowling challenge was successful is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-1. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1Z showing the enemy character X-1 and "victory!" The result image 018SG260B showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. The character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display. By displaying the character image 018SGX1Z in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the end of the series of effects.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), the character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2, the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2, and "victory!" The result image 018SG260C showing that the ally character A-2 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-3. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. The character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is hidden by the fade-out display. By displaying the character image 018SGX2Z in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the end of the series of effects.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1 and "victory!" The result image 018SG260D showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2 are "victory!". The result image 018SG260E showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are displayed, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (E6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C, A fixed decorative symbol (for example, 666, etc.), which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the 5R, and the characters "big hit" are displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation that the jackpot has been confirmed. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in the pass / fail button effect shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or when the push button 31B is pressed. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the long press operation being detected, the movable body effect is not executed, and as shown in FIGS. 13-16, the outlier is confirmed. The indicated missed confirmation notification is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and is an image showing a bowling pin that remains without falling. 018SG271 and a character display 018SG272 indicating "failure ..." are provided, and a result image 018SG270A indicating that the bowling challenge has failed is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-1. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIGS. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the ally character A-1. A character image 018SGA1 showing the character image 018SGA1, a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1, and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and the ally character A-1 battles with the enemy character X-1. The result image 018SG270B showing that the confrontation was defeated is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-2. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2 and the enemy. It has a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and is a result showing that the ally character A-2 has been defeated in the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270C is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-3. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the enemy. It has a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and is a result showing that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270E is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-2. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are displayed, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are hidden, and as shown in FIGS. 13-16 (H6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C, A definite decorative symbol (for example, 676, etc.) of a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach loss”) that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on the 5R, so that a loss confirmation notification indicating that the loss has been confirmed is executed. ..

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP reach effects A to C, the post-effect A shown in FIGS. 13-17 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmation decoration symbol (for example, 666) which is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, FIG. 13-17 In the re-lottery variable part shown in (F1), the re-variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-1. Is output.

Then, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variation), it is predetermined when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the revariable display. As a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination, a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. Further, as a light emitting effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM are lit based on the sound pattern BP4-2. Is output.

Further, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), when the jackpot type is jackpot B (probability variation), a predetermined jackpot occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the revariable display. As a fixed decorative symbol to be a combination, a combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-3. Is output.

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP reach effects D and E, the post-effect B shown in FIGS. 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmation decoration symbol (for example, 666) which is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, FIG. 13-18. In the scheduled ball ejection addition part shown in (G1-1), the background image 018SG280 showing the universe, the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and the scheduled launching number given in the jackpot game state displaying the scheduled ball ejection number. The scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 indicating the number of balls is displayed, and the post-production B is started. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-4. Is output.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the ally. An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and additional ball ejection number display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned ball ejection number is displayed. It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2 are displayed, and the ally. An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and additional ball ejection number display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned ball ejection number is displayed. It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “300”), the push button 31B is imitated. The button image 018SG283, the operation promotion display 018SG284 such as "press !!", and the gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation valid period are displayed, and the operation promotion effect for promoting the single push operation of the push button 31B is executed. To.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the pressing operation is performed. The character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX1 are displayed at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without being detected, the ally character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, and the counter value of the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-5. And sound effects are output.

On the other hand, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the pressing operation is performed. The character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX2 are displayed at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without being detected, the ally character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, and the counter value of the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-6. And sound effects and voices are output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), the character image 018SGA1 and the special image 018SGXZ that disappears after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown and becomes a star are displayed, and at the same time. The scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of planned balls that can be acquired in the case of "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-19 (G3), in the case of the jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"). After being updated and displayed in, it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach production type determination table)
Next, in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 executes the SP reach effect type when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern. In the determination process, the SP reach effect type determination table used when determining the SP reach effect type will be described. 13-20 is a diagram showing (A) the SP reach effect type determination table A, (B) the SP reach effect type determination table B, and (C) the SP reach effect type determination table C.

In the SP reach effect type determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach effect type are extracted, and SP reach is performed using any of the SP reach effect type determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. 13-20. Determine the production type.

In the SP reach effect type determination table, as shown in FIGS. 13-20 (A) to (C), "big hit C (10R)", "big hit B (6R)", "big hit A (6R)", "big hit A (6R)" Different determination values are assigned to each of the "missing" so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 13-20 (A) to 13-20 (C).

When the variation pattern is SP reach α, the SP reach effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 13-20 (A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit B (6R)", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "big hit A (6R)", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the variation pattern is SP reach β, the SP reach effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20 (B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-1" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". .. In the case of "big hit A (6R)", 70 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1" and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "off", 70 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PB-2" and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PC-2".

That is, when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state and the jackpot type is “big hit B (6R)” which is more advantageous for the player than “big hit A (6R)”, the SP reach effect is produced. C is determined at a higher rate than SP reach effect B.

When the fluctuation pattern is SP reach γ, the SP reach effect type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20 (C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1" and 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". .. In the case of "big hit B (6R)", 60 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PD-1" and 40 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PE-1". In the case of "off", 60 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PD-2" and 40 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PE-2".

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state and the jackpot type is “big hit C (10R)” which is more advantageous for the player than “big hit B (6R)”, the SP reach effect is produced. E is determined at a higher rate than SP reach effect D.

(Action / effect)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the enemy character X-1 is used to control the jackpot gaming state (for example, a first specific effect (for example). SP reach effect B) and a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) that notifies whether or not the enemy character is controlled to the jackpot gaming state can be executed, and the SP reach effect can be executed. When the big hit is notified, the "movable body effect" as a special effect can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach effect, and the operation of the movable body 32 during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect B. The character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with the effect image 018SG250B related to the above, and the character image 018SGX1 is displayed while the effect image 018SG250B in the same mode as the SP reach effect B is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect A. However, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect is a common light emission pattern LP3-in the case where the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect B and the case where the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect A. It is 2.

By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect are common between the SP reach effect B in which the enemy character is displayed and the SP reach effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed. While reducing the manufacturing cost, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the SP reach effect and the movable body effect depending on whether or not the enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect, and improve the effect.

More specifically, in the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect A, which have different effect modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 are the same for the movable body effect performed during the SP reach effect, but the effect. By setting the display mode corresponding to each SP reach effect for the image 018SG250B, it is possible to prevent the flow of the SP reach effect from being divided by the movable body effect.

In the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the SP reach effect B is applied as the first specific effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to any of the SP reach effects C to E. It is possible.

Further, the execution period of the movable body effect includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the effect mode in the first period is common to the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the effect mode in the second period is different between the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A (in FIG. 13-14 (D1)). The image shown is different from the image shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5)). By doing so, by making the production mode common until the first period, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and the SP reach productions B to E and the SP reach production A can be performed until the first period. Since it is unclear which one it is, it is possible to improve the production interest of the SP reach production.

Further, as the SP reach effect, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect E that displays the enemy X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot state is when the SP reach effect B is executed. And when the SP reach effect E is executed. That is, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. The determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect E is 800/997. Then, in the SP reach effect C, the effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach effect B corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 is displayed and the enemy is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect executed when the big hit is notified. The character image 018SGX2 showing the character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect C is the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect B. It is a common light emission pattern LP3-2.

By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 are shared to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the SP reach effect in which the ratio controlled to the big hit state is different is different. It is possible to increase the number of SP reach effects, and it is possible to pay attention to which SP reach effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, since the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image can be enhanced. , It is possible to enhance the effect of moving body production.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an enemy character and notifies whether or not the enemy character is used to control the jackpot gaming state in the first aspect (for example, SP reach effect B) and the second aspect. (For example, it can be executed with the SP reach effect D), and the movable body effect can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach effects B and D (ta3 to ta4 out of ta2 to ta5), and the movable body effect can be executed. During the period, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with the common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the operation of the movable body 32 in both the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, and in the case of the SP reach effect B. , The post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed instead of the post-effect B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect (see FIG. 13-17), while the SP reach effect D In this case, the post-effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect is executed.

By doing so, the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D share the same operation mode of the movable body 32 in the enemy character and the movable body effect to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the common enemy character X. By displaying -1 in different effects, the relationship between the SP reach effects B and D and the movable body effect and the SP reach effects B and D and the post-effects A and B can be enhanced, and the effect can be improved.

More specifically, even in the post-production after the big hit confirmation notification is performed in the SP reach production, the re-variation result notification of the decorative pattern and the scheduled number of balls are notified using the character displayed in the SP reach production. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach effect, notifications such as re-variation result notification and scheduled number of balls will be notified in common, while the display content will correspond to the type of SP reach effect from the SP reach effect. It is possible to show the post-production as a series of productions.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a special effect (for example, an effect in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special mode after the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect. Yes, in the SP reach effect B, the character image 018SGX1Z in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display is displayed in the jackpot notification before the post-effect A (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). In the SP reach effect D, in the post-effect B, a special image 018SGXZ that disappears after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown and becomes a star is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). By doing so, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the type of SP reach effect, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as a special effect, a defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by a fade-out display, or an attacked enemy character X-2 disappears after being skipped and becomes a star. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that the enemy character is hidden by the frame-out display and the image showing that the enemy character is hidden (for example, a star or the like) are illustrated. It may be an effect of displaying an effect image, etc.). In addition, there are various effects such as those in which the character is not hidden, the transmittance is increased, the brightness is lowered, the image is deformed, and the mode is changed even if the character is not hidden. It can be changed.

Further, when the SP reach effect B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, the “big hit” which is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit A (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled by "B (6R)" (second advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, the “big hit” is executed. The ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to which of the SP reach effects B and D is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and determines whether or not the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 are used to control the jackpot game state. The first specific effect to be notified (for example, SP reach effect D) and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 different from the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A- When a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state is executed by using 1 and the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect D. By displaying and operating the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach effect D, it is given in the jackpot game state in which it is notified that the character is controlled in the SP reach effect D. It is possible to execute the post-effect B that notifies the planned number of balls to be released, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A displayed in the SP reach effect E are executed. By displaying and operating -1, it is possible to execute the post-effect B that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state that the SP reach effect E is controlled, and at least the ally. The operation mode of the character A-1 is common to the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing so, by using a common ally character in the SP reach production and the post-production, it becomes easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach production and the post-production while reducing the manufacturing cost. Can also be increased.

Further, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that the background image is also included. Since it can be standardized, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

Further, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that the special character is also common. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

Further, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, an image in which the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 fight is displayed at the same time, and in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E, the enemy character Images of the battle between X-2 and ally character A-1 are displayed at the same time (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that each character is displayed at the same time, giving the impression of post-production B. It can be enhanced and the effect of production can be improved.

Further, as the post-effect, the effect control CPU 120 includes the first post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect D when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect D, and the SP. The second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect E when the movable body effect is executed in the reach effect E, and the movable body effect when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect A. The third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect A can be executed, and the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect E, and the SP reach. It depends on which of the production A is executed.

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, the “big hit C (10R)” (second advantage) is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit B (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled by the state) is 40% when the SP reach effect D is executed and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed, and the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state. At that time, the SP reach effect A executes the ratio controlled by the "big hit B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A (6R)" (first advantageous state). It is 100% when it is done.

By doing so, not only the big hit is notified by the SP reach effect, but also the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP reach effect is executed, so that the player for the SP reach effect It is possible to raise the degree of attention of the game, and to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the above embodiment, as the first post-effect of the effect mode related to the first specific effect, the ally character and the enemy character displayed in the SP reach effect D are displayed, so that the first ex-post effect is displayed. The effect is related to the first specific effect, and as the second post-effect of the effect mode related to the second specific effect, the ally character and the enemy character displayed in the SP reach effect E are displayed. The second post-effect is related to the second specific effect, and the ally character and the enemy character are not displayed in the SP reach effect A and the post-effect A, thereby exemplifying the form in which the third post-effect is related to the third specific effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the character displayed in the SP reach effect is displayed as the third post-effect of the effect mode related to the third specific effect. The 3 post-production may be related to the 3rd specific production.

That is, if the post-effect related to the specific effect is an effect in which the display mode in the specific effect and at least a part of the effect modes are common, the common effect mode is that the character is displayed or the character is not displayed. If they are common, the character types displayed in the specific effect and the post-effect may be different. Further, it may have four or more types of specific effects and post-effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be executed in a low base state, and the third specific effect can be executed in a high base state. The first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are not limited to each other, and may be an effect that can be executed in a low base state or an effect that can be executed in a high base state. That is, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may be any effect that can be determined regardless of the gaming state.

Further, as the third specific effect, the SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character X-3 different from the enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state can be executed. Well, in this case, the ratio controlled by the jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%)> SP reach effect E (35%)> SP reach effect D (15%). The post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when the big hit is notified in the SP reach effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Further, in the SP reach effect F, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-6 (B) is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the SP reach effects A to E, and is shown in FIGS. 13-6. The sound pattern of the movable body effect shown in (C) is preferably the sound pattern BP0-1 to 3 common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, for example, an advantageous state in which the big hit gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the planned number of balls to be released is A form to which a large number of 10R jackpots C) and an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C controlled to a probable change state after the end of the jackpot) is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state is the number of balls released, the number of game rounds, the control period of the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the small hit state, as compared with the first advantageous state. It may include a state in which the fall rate of probability fluctuation is advantageous. Further, the jackpot gaming state or the effect mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be an advantageous state or the like that is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 018SG is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature sections 069G and 099G, for example, the SP reach effect A in the feature section 018SG is applied to the SP reach A and B of the feature sections 069G and 099G. It is applied, and the SP reach effects B and C in the feature unit 018SG are applied to the SP reach C of the feature units 069G and 099G, and the SP reach effects D and E in the feature unit 018SG are applied to the SP reach D of the feature units 069G and 099G. It is possible.

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature unit 018SG)
The feature unit 018SG exemplifies a form in which a big hit gaming state is applied as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit gaming state and the time saving state (high base state) are not limited to this. , Probability change state, etc. may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied is exemplified as an example of the movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board is not limited to this. Alternatively, a movable body or the like provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific effect of notifying whether or not the game is controlled in an advantageous state, a mode in which the SP reach effects A to E for notifying whether or not the game is controlled in the jackpot game state is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach effect, a post-effect, or the like may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific character or a special character, an example in which the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 confronting the ally characters A-1 and A-2 are applied has been exemplified, but the present invention illustrates this. The present invention is not limited, and enemy characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront ally characters, and the like may be applicable. Further, a character or the like composed of an image in which a person is made into a live-action image may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, an embodiment in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 confronting enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are applied as special characters, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, ally characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront the enemy character, and the like may be applicable. Further, a character or the like composed of an image in which a person is made into a live-action image may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific effect in which the character is displayed, a form in which the SP reach effects A to E in which the special character (friendly character) confronts the specific character or the special character (enemy character) is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a special character, a specific character, or a special character is applied to a plurality of ally characters or enemy characters or a plurality of characters that do not confront each other without confrontation. good.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, an embodiment in which the movable body effect is applied as a special effect of operating the movable body and emitting light of the light emitting body is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the movable body 32. You may apply the effect of operating the movable body of. Further, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the execution time of the movable body effect is set before the big hit confirmation notification in the latter stage of the SP reach effects A to E, but it can be changed in various ways such as in the middle stage of the SP reach effects A to E. Is. Further, although the movable body effect can be started in response to the operation of the push button 31B of the player, it may be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the movable body effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 emit light, a sound effect is output, and the push button 31B vibrates according to the operation of the movable body 32. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light guide plate light emitting effect using the light guide plate device may be enabled according to the operation of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device is common in the SP reach effects A to E as in the light emitting pattern of the LED.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, a form in which the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , It may be an effect image of a mode related to the operation mode (for example, vibration) of the movable body 32 (for example, a mode representing an impact), an effect image of a mode for emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32, or the like. It may be.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a post-effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, after executing the revariable display of the fixed decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An example is an example in which the effect A and the post-effect B that informs the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state notified by using the ally character or the enemy character that appeared in the SP reach effect are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect as long as it is an effect performed after the special effect. Or a small hit medium effect executed in a small hit game state may be applicable.

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the post-effect B for notifying the planned number of balls to be given in the notified big hit game state is executed before the variable display ends, but the big hit game state. It is possible to execute a post-production that informs the planned number of balls to be given in the notified jackpot game state during the fanfare period from the start of the game to the start of the round game and the round interval between the game rounds. May be.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the post-effect B, the jackpot is used as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the jackpot gaming state notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E. Although the embodiment in which the planned number of balls to be given is identifiable is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds and the like may be notified.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the post-effect B, the embodiment in which the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E is notified has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, for example, when the jackpot has been held for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) or more, the first number of balls is replaced with the above-mentioned planned number of balls, or in addition to the planned number of balls. The total number of balls that have been acquired so far from the jackpot game state may be notified. Further, when the number of balls is added in the scheduled ball addition part in the post-production B, or when the planned number of balls is notified in the scheduled ball notification part, the total number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 2500 balls, 5000 balls). When the number of balls, 7,500 balls, 10,000 balls, etc.) is exceeded, it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, while the types of ally characters and enemy characters to be confronted are different in the SP reach effects A to E, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B in the movable body effect are common. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the SP reach effects A to E, the type and execution ratio of various advance notice effects such as chance up, the battle confrontation period, and the operation mode of the character. And the display mode may be different depending on the variable display result, and even in such a case, it is preferable that the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B in the movable body effect are common.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the SP reach effects D and E exemplify an embodiment in which the execution period of the scheduled ball addition part and the scheduled ball notification part in the post-production B is the same. The execution period of the scheduled ball addition part and the scheduled ball notification part may be different depending on the type of big hit, that is, the size of the planned number of balls.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C can be executed in a low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E can be executed in a high base state, but the present invention is limited thereto. All of the above-mentioned specific effects (SP reach effects) may be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may be effects that can be performed in a high base state. That is, it may be possible to execute in any type of gaming state.

Although the feature portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiment of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and changes are made within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Even if there is an addition, it is included in the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for gaming. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines where winning is possible.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition.
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state.
A decidable means that can be determined to control to the advantageous state,
Movable movable body and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state is a first special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state controlled on condition that a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. And a third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the first effect that the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect and the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the specific effect. There are 2 production execution patterns,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect in the third special state. Higher than the rate at which the production execution pattern is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images